JP2018183290A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of reducing coming and going between a game program and a non-game program as much as possible.SOLUTION: A slot machine 1 includes an ROM 41b having a storage area storing a program, and a main control part 41 performing control on the basis of the program stored to the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area storing a game program related to game progress and a non-game program area called by the game program that stores a non-game program unrelated to the game progress. In the non-game program, by calling one non-game program (for example, non-game related processing) from the game program (for example, timer interruption processing), abnormality determination (for example, determination of abnormality about token discharge and determination of abnormality about token charge) and output control of a test signal to be output to a testing device among external output signals output to an external apparatus connected to the slot machine 1 are performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  As this type of gaming machine, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program area for storing a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated to the ROM. Has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-87255

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a non-game program is called from a game program every time a process included in the non-game program is executed in the game program, the game program and the non-game program are repeatedly executed. There will be a problem that the processing will become complicated.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the traffic between a game program and a non-game program as much as possible.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is:
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a) for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area for storing a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game;
Including
When a non-game program (non-game related process) is called from the game program once, abnormality determination (sensor monitoring process) in the non-game program and output control of an external output signal output to an external device (test signal output process) It is characterized by performing.
According to this feature, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, In the configuration in which the non-game program is called from the game program once, abnormality determination and output control of the external output signal output to the external device are performed in the non-game program. Going and going to and from the game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is sectional drawing of a medal selector in a state where a flow path switching solenoid is turned off, and (b) is an AA sectional view of (a). (A) is sectional drawing of a medal selector in the state which turned on the flow-path switching solenoid, (b) is BB sectional drawing of (a). FIGS. 4A and 4B are peripheral portions of the inserted medal sensor in the CC sectional view of FIG. 4A, and FIG. 4A is a cross section when no medal is detected by the inserted medal sensor (physical sensor). FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view when a medal is detected by the inserted medal sensor (physical sensor). It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initial setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal insertion signal process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor check process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the state transition of the medal insertion signal in which the normal passage of a medal is determined in medal insertion signal processing and medal sensor check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the data processing for ratio monitoring which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of each state count process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the update condition of the accumulation buffer, the buffer for 6000 times calculation, and the buffer for total accumulation calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the electrical disconnection process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the non-game related process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the test signal output process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal passage time timer update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating blink control of a role ratio monitor. 6 is a front view showing an internal structure of the slot machine in Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the totaling method of the data displayed on a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the data extracted in an extraction process.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine that is a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the side end of the housing 1a.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  A plurality of types of symbols (eg, “7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, “replay”, etc.) that can be distinguished from each other) are predetermined on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In this order, 20 are drawn each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at the approximate center of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. On the other hand, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped from rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Note that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the present embodiment are used by the player by rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface using the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. Although it is the structure which can perform the fluctuation | variation display which moves the several symbol which can be visually recognized, the means to perform the fluctuation | variation display which moves a some symbol may be other than a reel, for example, several on the outer peripheral surface The structure etc. which can perform a fluctuation | variation display by moving the belt in which the pattern is arrange | positioned may be sufficient.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are arranged to output a detection signal when the lower end of the symbol area of symbol number 1 passes through a predetermined position on each reel for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The lower end of the symbol area of symbol number 1 is the reel reference position for each reel.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a transmissive liquid crystal panel in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element. Thus, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, there are a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). Using the MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range, setting of medals and bets stored as credits Settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medals used in the game are settled (the medals used for setting credits and bets are returned), start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and reels 2L and 2C. Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated when stopping the rotation of 2R and an effect switch 56 used for effects can be operated by the player. It is provided.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, and the contents when an error occurs. Game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code, 1 BETLED 14 for notifying that the bet number is set by 1, 2 BETLED 15 for notifying that the bet number is set, and 2 bet numbers for 3 settings A 3BET LED 16 for notifying that the game has been performed, an insertion request LED 17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted by lighting, and a start valid LED 18 for notifying that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective. , Wait (reel rotation starts because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting the effect that the stand to have the state) during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective are provided inside the 8R. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective is provided inside the effect switch 56.

  On the inner side of the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state and a stop state described later without opening the front door 1b by a predetermined key operation, A setting value display 24 that displays a setting value at that time while changing a setting value or checking a setting value, which will be described later. A stop switch 36a for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function controlled to the state), and automatic settlement processing (medal stored as credits is settled (returned) regardless of the player's operation) An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function controlled in the processing), and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 as described below. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the par tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side or the medal payout exit 9 side, and a medal that has been introduced from the medal insertion unit 4 and has flowed to the hopper tank 34a side is detected. An insertion medal sensor 31, a medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of a foreign object on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31, and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided. It has been.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), and the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively provided in the housing 1a. Reel unit 2 comprising detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 3), external output board 1000 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external output signal, and medal inserted from medal insertion unit 4 are stored. Hopper tank 34a, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 3), and a payout sensor 34c for detecting the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 3). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, there is provided an overflow tank 35 in which medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a are stored. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 3) for detecting that the stored medal is full is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a function key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. In the setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power source that is operated when turning on / off the power source A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a store clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, only the store clerk possessing the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the store clerk of the amusement store. Operation is possible.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is awarded. It is defined as a line. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the combination of symbols constituting the winning line is aligned on the winning line LN, in addition to the winning line LN, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 (LM1 is the left middle right reel). LM2 is a line over each middle stage of the left middle right reel, LM3 is a line over each bottom stage of the left middle right reel, and LM4 is a bottom stage of the left reel and a middle stage of the middle reel , The line that extends to the top of the right reel.) The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols arranged in the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line is displayed. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is selected when winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, a symbol that constitutes a specific winning line on winning line LN is displayed. It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the invalid line LM1 and the reel 2L set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. The lower stage, the lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, Invalid line LM3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line set over the symbols arranged in the upper right direction Four types of LM4 are defined as invalid lines LM.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a winning combination, a winning combination is achieved when a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry”) determined as a winning combination in the winning line LN is prepared, and a predetermined symbol combination is also obtained. If the combination of symbols (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”), which is an index that is easier to recognize than the predetermined symbol combination, is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4, the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 It includes a role that can appear as if it has been won by a combination of symbols arranged in any one of them. Hereinafter, a combination of symbols that is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN is referred to as a symbol combination serving as an index, and constitutes a symbol combination serving as an index. The symbol is called an index symbol.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, a winning determination may be made based on a combination of display results derived for all two or more reels. In this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by physical reels. However, the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated until the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped is 190 milliseconds (ms).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 20 (number of symbols per reel) = 1600 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols in 190 milliseconds Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol 4 from the reference is used. Since the symbols up to the top of the frame can be displayed in the lower row, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, on the winning line of the reel corresponding to the stop switch The symbols arranged within 5 frames including the symbols displayed on can be displayed on the winning line.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C as a middle reel, and the reel 2R as a right reel. Further, an operation for stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 plays the game. The production is controlled in accordance with the state, and the power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each unit.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. To be supplied. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input. Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected and driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer including a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d, and includes a random number circuit for generating random numbers for internal lottery, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. And a main control unit 41 that directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and inputs from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101. The switch detection circuit 44 that captures the detected signal and transmits it to the main control unit 41, and the motor drive that transmits the motor drive signal (stepping motor phase signal) output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R Switching the solenoid drive signal output from the circuit 45 and the main control unit 41 A solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits to the renoid 30, an LED drive circuit 47 that transmits LED drive signals output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40, and a slot machine 1 When a voltage drop is detected by monitoring the voltage of the power supply to be detected, a power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, and when power is turned on or off And a reset circuit 49 for providing a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power supply is unstable.

  The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used for the main CPU 41a to perform calculations. The plurality of registers include registers such as an accumulator register, a flag register, a general-purpose register, an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter. Among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general-purpose register include a front register and a back register configured to be a pair (hereinafter, the front register and the back register may be simply referred to as a register). is there). The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as an operation instruction and a read instruction included in the program, and stores the RAM 41c specified by the value (address) of the predetermined register. It is possible to update the value (data) stored in the area.

  Of the registers included in the main control unit 41, the flag register is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate the result of the operation executed by the instruction executed by the main CPU 41a, and the change in the state of the flag register is utilized. The main CPU 41a can be made to perform processing according to the calculation result of the previous instruction.

  The flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and the plurality of bits include an arithmetic instruction executed by the main CPU 41a in order to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 41a. Although the state changes according to the result, the first bit (hereinafter, the first zero flag) is configured so that the state does not change with a specific instruction (for example, a read instruction LD (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an LD instruction)). Z may be referred to as “Z”), or the second bit (hereinafter referred to as the second zero flag TZ) configured such that the state changes according to the operation result of the operation instruction and the state also changes with the specific instruction. ) Etc. are included. In each process included in a game program to be described later, when the process proceeds based on an instruction, a determination or the like is performed with reference to the value of a bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register. The determination of the bit value of the second zero flag is not made by referring to the value.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

  The I / O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R from the output port 0 and the output port 1, and the output port 2 It is possible to output control signals for the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R and the control signal for the flow path switching solenoid 30, and it is possible to output a control signal for the hopper motor 34b and an external output signal from the output port 3. From the output port 4 and the output port 5, control signals for the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET switch valid LED 21 are sent. Output is possible, the test signal can be output from the output port 6, and the output port 7 than is capable of outputting an external output signal, which can output a command from the output port 8 and an output port 9.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes timer interrupt processing (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required for the process that repeats depending on the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between this time and the next timer interrupt process (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. In addition, presentation devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the production effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are connected, and these production devices are based on the control by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the production control board 90. It is designed to be driven. In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units. Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a sub control unit 91 for controlling the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control, an effect effect LED 52, an LED drive circuit 93 for controlling drive of the reel LED 55, a sound output circuit 94 for controlling sound output from the speakers 53, 54, A reset circuit 95 for providing a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time; a switch detection circuit 96 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; A clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information; A power interruption detection circuit 98 that monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the lot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a when a voltage drop is detected, and other circuits are mounted. Has been.

  In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40, the sub-control unit 91 performs various controls for performing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage such as an internal lottery. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is performed on the condition that the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. Can be started. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in this embodiment, the winning line LN is always activated. The winning line LN is simply referred to as a winning line) and a combination of symbols called “comb” is awarded. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each combination described above before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7 Is determined using a random number. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, there is a general role (hereinafter referred to as a duplicate winning role) that is elected in duplicate with the special role. If the duplicate winning role is won in the internal lottery, the special role is also duplicated. The combination of symbols constituting the duplicate winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, so that it is suggested that the special combination may be won. It has become.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, a small combination that can generate a winning by stopping the symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN only when the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined stopping order, A re-playing role (which may be referred to as a push order) and a small role or re-playing role that can cause a winning to occur by aligning the symbols constituting the role to the winning line LN regardless of the stopping order, Can be won).

  In addition, in the internal lottery, special roles (special small roles or special replaying roles) that are different from the normal roles are included as the roles that can be won. A right (hereinafter referred to as AT right) controlled by an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) described later can be won over the number of games.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Control is possible in an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period during which notification can be performed, and the right to be controlled by the AT is won, and a predetermined start condition (for example, after the AT right is won, The main control unit 41 starts the AT control when the number of games elapses, and after the AT right is won, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) Control to AT. And, when controlling to the AT, it is advantageous for the player by executing the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination (corresponding combination among the above-mentioned push order combinations) according to the game state. By notifying the operation mode (push order, operation timing) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and transmitting a command that can specify an operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal A navigation effect using the display 51 or the like is executed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode that is notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the push order winning in the internal lottery. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state where the control is not performed by the AT.

  Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. The main control unit 41 displays the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Referring to this, a stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing in a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, if any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop, and the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped without being aligned in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the maximum on the winning line when the stop operation is performed If it is possible to align and stop the winning roles in the 4-frame pull-in range, control will be performed to align them and stop them, and the winning roles will be selected on the winning line within the maximum 4-frame pull-in range. If it is not possible to withdraw, if a special role that has been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, it will be controlled and stopped. Control to stop without aligning in the drawing range of 4 frames will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. In the case where a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination. Also, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. You may perform control to align.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time, such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the stop operation is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. A configuration that performs stop control by specifying the stop position from the table and stopping the reel at the specified stop position, and searching for a stop position that can be stopped when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control that identifies and stops the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and can be stopped without using the stop control table or the stop position table A configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying the stop position together, and a configuration that performs stop control by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table. It may be.

[About medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the state where the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

  The medal selector 29 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, and an inlet 141 through which the medal can flow into the main body is formed on the upper side wall of the main body of the medal selector 29. An outlet 142 is provided on the left side wall of the main body so that medals can flow out from the inside of the main body to the outside on the hopper tank 34a side. A discharge port 143 through which medals can be discharged to the outside on the medal payout exit 9 side is provided. A medal flow channel having a substantially L shape in front view, which communicates from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142, is formed inside the main body of the medal selector 29. As shown in FIGS. 4 (b) and 5 (b), the side wall of the medal flow channel is located on the front side from the lower side to the upper side so that the upper end of the flowing medal is inclined forward with respect to the lower end. Inclined. In addition, a medal flow channel having a substantially S-shape in front view that communicates from the inflow port 141 to the discharge port 143 is formed. Hereinafter, of the medal flow channels inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow channel on the inlet 141 side is the medal inflow channel 29a, the flow channel on the outflow port 142 is the medal receiving flow channel 29b, and the outlet 143 side. The flow path is referred to as a medal return flow path 29c.

  In the medal selector 29, the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medal is discriminated. After the authentic medal flows from the inlet 141, the main body of the medal selector 29 After flowing through the internal medal inflow passage 29a and the medal receiving passage 29b and passing through the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c, the outlet medal sensors 31a to 31c detect the flow and the outlet 142 Spilled from. The medal is guided to the hopper tank 34a through the medal chute 142a (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, the false medal flows into the medal return channel 29c while flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a after flowing in from the inflow port 141, flows down the medal return channel 29c, and flows out from the discharge port 143. The The medal is returned to the lower plate from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1) through a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

  Further, at the junction of the medal inflow channel 29a, the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal return channel 29c, excitation of a channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is performed. In cooperation, before the medal flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flows into the medal receiving channel 29b, the medal is forcibly dropped from the medal inflow channel 29a downward, and the medal is returned. A flow path switching plate 147 for allowing flow into the flow path 29c is provided to be swingable.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b), the flow path switching plate 147 is formed in the medal inflow flow path 29a in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not excited, that is, in a state where acceptance of medals is not permitted. The lower side is open and can be moved so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c communicate with each other. Further, in the state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, that is, in the state where the reception of medals is permitted, the upper part of the flow path switching plate 147 is left in the drawing as shown in FIGS. By swinging in the direction (arrow A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 becomes a state constituting the bottom surface of the medal inflow path 29a, and the lower side of the medal inflow path 29a is closed, and the medal inflow The flow path 29a and the medal return flow path 29c are configured to be movable so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, the medals flowing from the inlet 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147. It flows into the medal receiving passage 29b and flows out from the outlet 142.

  Further, an inlet sensor 26 for detecting the passage of the medal that flows in from the inflow port 141 is provided on the upstream side of the medal inflow channel 29a, and an outlet 142 is provided on the downstream side of the medal receiving channel 29b. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting the passage of discharged medals are provided.

  Of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c pass the medal when the medal passes between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit and the light receiving unit detects the light blocking from the light projecting unit. The inserted medal sensor 31b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of the medal by detecting the movement of the movable piece 180 that operates in conjunction with the passage of the medal by the detector 183. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 3. In addition, a range where the medal passage is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as a detection range A.

  Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing the periphery of the inserted medal sensor 31b in the CC cross-sectional view of FIG. 4 (a), and FIG. 6 (a) shows the detection of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. FIG. 6B is a diagram when the medal does not pass through the range A, and FIG. 6B is a diagram when the medal passes through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a), 5 (a), 6 (a) and 6 (b), the inserted medal sensor 31b is movable on the side wall of the lower portion of the medal selector 29 on the downstream side of the medal receiving passage 29b. The piece 180 is provided in the medal receiving passage 29b so as to be able to appear and disappear. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, a detector 183 is installed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180 outside the medal receiving flow path 29b. In the detector 183, a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit are provided in the detection unit 183a.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the medal passes through the medal receiving flow path 29b, the movable piece 180 moves away from the tip 180b of the movable piece 180 from the medal receiving flow path 29b. The detected portion 180a provided at the end of the movable piece 180 is caused to enter between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a, and light irradiated from the light projecting portion to the light receiving portion is received. It is cut off and the passage of medals is detected by the detector 183. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the movable piece 180, the tip 180b of the movable piece 180 protrudes into the medal receiving flow path 29b when the medal is not passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b. It is so energized. In this state, the detected part 180a of the movable piece 180 does not enter between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the detection part 183a, and the light irradiated from the light projecting part of the detection part 183a to the light receiving part may be blocked. Therefore, the passage of medals is not detected by the detector 183.

[About the memory area and program of the main control unit]
FIG. 7 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 7, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

  The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a title and version of the program can be set, and a later description. The vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) in which the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction to be executed and the start address of timer interrupt processing (main) are set, and parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 41 in hardware It includes a set HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited.

  The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

  The memory area of the RAM 41c includes a usable area (F000H to F400H) usable as a work and an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H to store a group of registers for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) where access is prohibited.

  FIG. 8 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game. In the case of a slot machine, the stage where the game can be started by setting the number of bets is started and the reel is rotated. A step of stopping the reel, a step of deriving a display result, and a step of assigning a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are allocated separately, and are allocated backward in the storage area of the ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area before the non-program area, a storage area for the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game It can be easily specified according to the difference.

  The game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allocated to continuous areas, respectively, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game are not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and game data area related to the progress of the game, and the progress of the game Non-game programs and non-game data areas that are not involved can be easily specified according to the difference in storage areas.

  In the above description, before and after the storage area is a magnitude relationship between the address values assigned to the storage area. The smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. For this reason, the storage area allocated behind the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated ahead of the one storage area. This corresponds to a storage area having an address value smaller than that of one storage area.

  Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a game program is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is allocated before the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to areas adjacent to each other with the unused area 1 in between, and even in such a structure, the game program area related to the progress of the game Therefore, it is possible to easily identify a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in storage area.

  In addition, in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, since 0 values are stored in all areas, a game program area and game data area, a non-game program area and non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, they can be easily found.

  It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all of the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2 and can be easily detected even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2. .

  Further, as long as the game program area and the non-game program area are assigned to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in the storage areas.

  The game program area and the non-game program area both start from an address (0H) having the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Among them, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same low-order 4 digit value when the address is expressed in binary, but also the low-order 1 digit value when expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so that not only when the address is expressed in binary, but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal, the game program area and the non-game program area are easily distinguished from other areas. can do.

  It should be noted that both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address having the same value in the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal. With this configuration, the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1 The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game An area where the program can be referred to, an area where the game program cannot be referred to, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data are included. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, the game stack area and the non-game program may be provided with a single stack area.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used, and is an area that is redundant with respect to a game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-related not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage areas.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . Further, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access in the usable area of the RAM 41c when an access is prohibited in the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, and when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c, In other words, when an access is made to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area unrelated to the operation If an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc. Even, it is possible to prevent illegal program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and a group including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to be permitted, the other areas, that is, the program / data area of the game program, game data, non-game program, Non-game data is not stored Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Are allocated to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, while the permission is set, even if access to other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and a program / data Out of the areas, a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area), a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area) A configuration may be adopted in which access is set to permit and access to other areas is prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or a non-game program is not stored in the program / data area. Access is prohibited, so the intent of unauthorized programs and unauthorized data Can be prevented without control will take place. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Of the program / data area including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area), and the area including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area). (Access to the data area) may be set to permit, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or non-game in the program / data area Access to an area where no program is stored Because There is inhibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In the above description, the area where access is permitted is set in the program / data area. However, by setting the area where access is prohibited in the program / data area, the area where access is indirectly permitted is set. It is good also as a structure to be performed.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 executes the user program when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program travel is permitted, that is, in a normal operation. When the user program is executed in an unoccupied area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in the use area or the like, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running in other areas, that is, areas that do not store gaming programs or non-gaming programs in the program / data area is prohibited. Control line It can be prevented been.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area And the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as a designated area that permits program running based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to unauthorized programs and unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and an HW parameter area. Based on the parameters set in the above, a group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area (area from the game program area to the non-game data area) For example, the IAT circuit 506a may be set as a designated area for permitting program running at once and the program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of which game programs and non-game programs are stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a is collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running and the program running in other areas is prohibited, the area up to the non-game data area) Unintended control It can be prevented been.

  In the above description, the program / data area is configured to set the area that permits the program travel. However, the program / data area allows the program travel to be indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program travel. It is good also as a structure by which an area | region is set.

[Instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during execution of another program.

  In addition, CALL instructions, CALLV instructions, RST instructions, and the like are included as calling instructions that cause the main control unit 41 to call and execute a program stored in the program / data area.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at an address designated in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the call source address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies both an upper address and a lower address and specifies an address by the specified upper address and lower address to call a subroutine, whereas a CALLV instruction only receives a lower address. By specifying, this is an instruction for calling a subroutine by specifying an address based on an upper address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and a specified lower address, and the subroutine can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible to call.

  The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data than instructions and CALLV instructions. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction is returned to.

  The jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the movement source program.

  Among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are particularly frequently used are stored in an area of the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, a specific value is set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. The main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the head address has a specific value, thereby specifying the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the address including the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a subroutine that is used frequently in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and is based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address, and when calling these subroutines It is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address.

  In this embodiment, the beginning of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction. Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to the CALL instruction, so the use of a CALLV instruction or RST instruction in a game program can reduce the data capacity of the game program. Yes. The vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b store the beginning of the subroutine of the game program, so that the beginning of the non-game program is not stored, and the non-game program is generated by the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. Will be called, and will not hinder the reduction of the data capacity of the game program.

  Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are used frequently are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b in the area where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine to be called at the time, and the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the top address is a specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. Even if it is configured to call and execute, subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both upper and lower addresses. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  In addition, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, etc. If a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address to be specified is used, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, identification values having a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated, thereby identifying the areas. Even in a configuration using a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for designating an address when calling the subroutine. .

  The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), or the aforementioned illegal access reset. The value set in the area, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH ( If the value set in the vector table area is neither the value indicating the area outside the program setting nor the FFFFH, it is started. Is not intended due to the occurrence of an interrupt, etc. There can be prevented in advance that would be executed.

  An LD command is included as a read command that causes the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  The LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. The normal LD instruction is an instruction for reading out data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c by using the designated upper address and lower address by designating both the upper address and the lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction By specifying only the lower address, the address is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the specified lower address, and the ROM 41b or RAM 41c This is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a designated register, and can store predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller amount of data than a normal LD instruction. It becomes possible.

  When reading data stored in specific areas of the ROM 41b and RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, all addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area are obtained by using the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. Instead of specifying, it is possible to read out data in a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that reads both data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and the address is specified when reading the data. It is possible to reduce the waste of programs for doing so.

  In addition, among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, particularly frequently used game data is stored in an area of the game RAM area where the start address is a specific value, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( Q register) is set as the upper address of the game data, and when the game data is read by the main control unit 41, only the lower address is specified using the LDQ instruction, and the game data is read out. It is possible to read game data with a small amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction for reading data by specifying both an address and a lower address, and a program for specifying an address when reading these game data Can reduce waste.

  The main control unit 41 can change the value set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine, and the internal register in the initial setting process performed at the start-up as described later. In the setting, a specific value indicating a start address of game data frequently used by a game program is set in a special register (Q register). Also, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved, and when returning to the game program, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved. It is set again to the value that had been. As a result, when a game program is being executed, a specific value indicating the start address of game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). It is possible to read out frequently used game data using the LDQ instruction.

  The upper address used when reading with the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (for example, Q register), for example, a vector table area. A special LD instruction is used in which a part of an address is specified using a value stored in a predetermined storage area, and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address by a program. If it is a structure, the waste of the program for designating an address when reading data can be reduced. In addition, for example, by assigning identification values having a data amount smaller than addresses to a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, setting data storage addresses in the plurality of areas, and specifying the identification values, respectively. Even if the configuration uses a special LD instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of data stored in the area corresponding to the identification value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data Can do.

  In this embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program as the specific value, but may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-special program is called, a value different from a value used in the specific program as a specific value in the Q register, and the value of the top address of the storage area in which frequently used data in the non-game program is stored Can be stored, and the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced by using the LDQ instruction when calling data in the non-specific program.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, a non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even when the game program is called to return to the game program without executing processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. It is a program for executing processing.

  In the game program, any of the above-described CALL instruction and LD instruction may include any CALLV instruction, RST instruction, which is a special CALL instruction, or LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction. It is possible to call a subroutine by specifying an address using, or to read out specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c using a special LD instruction.

  In the non-game program, while the normal CALL instruction is used for the CALL instruction described above, the CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction is not used, and the address is specified using the normal CALL instruction. While the subroutine may be called, the subroutine is not called using a special CALL instruction, and the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

  In addition, in the non-game program, an ordinary LD instruction or an LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, may be used for the above-described LD instruction. It is possible to read the subroutine and data using a special LD instruction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the beginning of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction which are special CALL instructions. A game program can be called by using a special CALL instruction. In this way, when it is possible to call only a game program by a special CALL instruction, the game program is called by a non-game program by using a special CALL instruction by a non-game program, and an unintended game Or the game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling a program with a normal CALL instruction instead of a special CALL instruction with a non-game program, the game program is called unintentionally without using the vector table area and the specific address area. Can be prevented from proceeding.

  In this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, reads a predetermined game data by specifying a game RAM area by using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register). The game data can be easily read while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program by using a special LD instruction even in the non-specific program.

  The LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can read out predetermined game data by specifying a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register). However, when the game data is read by a special LD instruction, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be normally specified, and unintended data is stored. There is a risk of being read out. On the other hand, when a non-game program switches from a game program to a non-game program by reading data using a normal LD command instead of the LDQ command, which is a special LD command, the specific value is damaged. Even in this case, the game RAM area is specified from the non-game program and data is read out, so that unintended data can be prevented from being read out.

  In the present embodiment, as an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save instruction that is saved by storing a register value of the main control unit 41 in a predetermined order in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, Then, the register values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order to the save time, and set in the register corresponding to the order. And a return instruction for returning to the state when the state is saved by the save instruction.

  The save instruction stores the operation result of the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. And a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, the register value can be saved in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and the save instruction is executed in the non-game program. Thus, the value of the register can be saved in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

  The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. Among them, the flag register for storing the operation result includes a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. Yes, by executing a return instruction in the non-game program, the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program is called, and the corresponding register is loaded. It can be set and restored.

[About the game flow]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and ends the process based on the non-game program. Thereafter, the process returns to the processing based on the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 41a, in principle, executes the process based on the game program by referring to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. The main CPU 41a, in principle, executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  The main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing the processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. Yes, in executing processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the process based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area necessary for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). In the processing based on the game RAM area, only specific areas required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where the process based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where the process based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to a continuous address area. However, a configuration in which part or all of the address areas are allocated to non-contiguous address areas may be used.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readable and stored, and work data referred to by the game program Is a game RAM area that is stored so as to be readable and writable, a program that is called by the game program, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that is referenced by the non-game program Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program are stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and work program work data; Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  In addition, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be managed in a compact manner according to each function. It becomes easier to specify the corresponding data.

  Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be used easily. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). The processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only specific areas (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-gaming program in the gaming RAM area. Therefore, since the data that can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data that can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

  Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 executing the game program and the non-game program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Processing at the time of starting the main control unit 41 and initial setting processing]
The startup process and initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The startup process and the initial setting process are subroutines included in the game program.

  When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 starts up in a state where the timer interrupt is prohibited due to the occurrence of a reset, and performs various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. After the start, first, a start time setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all output ports 0 to 9, and an internal register included in the main control unit 41 is preset in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. An initialization process included in the game program, which is initialized based on the built-in register initialization table, is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the initial setting process is started in a state where timer interrupts are prohibited. In the initial setting process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1) and output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. It is determined whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (Sa2). When the power interruption detection signal is in the ON state, the process waits until the power interruption detection signal is in the OFF state. Thereafter, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power interruption detection signal is turned off, the parity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in the step of Sa3 is normal (Sa5). If the parity is normal, the RAM destruction diagnosis fixed data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired at the time of power failure. Then, based on the RAM destruction diagnosis fixed data, it is diagnosed whether the storage contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed (Sa7).

  If it is determined in step Sa5 that the parity is normal, and if the storage contents of RAM 41c are diagnosed in step Sa7, RAM 41c is stored in RAM 41c based on the parity of RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7. It is determined whether there is an abnormality (Sa8). The case where there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c is a case where the parity is not normal, or a case where it is diagnosed that the parity is normal but the stored content is abnormal.

  If there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to call and execute a non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program (Sa10).

  In the non-game RAM area initialization process, first, using the above-described LD instruction, the address value indicated by the current stack pointer SP is obtained from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. Read and store in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and evacuate. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program. Thus, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the non-game RAM area initialization process sets the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is It may be different from the state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization process.

  Thereafter, the start address of the initialization target RAM (first address of the unused area 4) and the end address (last address of the non-game RAM area) are specified, and the data of the specified address is set with the start address as the initial value of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the process of updating the designated address to the next address after clearing until the designated address reaches the end address, the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM (in this embodiment, The area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-game RAM area) is initialized. In the non-game RAM area initialization process, by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is allocated to the initialization target RAM. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

  Then, using the above-described first return instruction, the register values stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started are stored in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started. Thereafter, using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started is read and set as a value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is ended. In order to finish the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, all register values saved at the start of the non-game RAM area initialization process are restored. Then, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after. That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization process is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started.

  When the non-game RAM area initialization process is performed in the step Sa10, the non-game RAM area in the RAM 41c is initialized, and the process returns to the initial setting process, the game is performed in the step Sa9 using the above-described second return instruction. The flag register value saved in the stack area is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the save time and set in the flag register, so that the flag register is returned to the state before the non-game RAM area initialization process is performed. Is restored (Sa11). The non-game RAM area is obtained by performing the save and restore processes for all registers in the non-game RAM area initialization process in step Sa10 and the flag register save and restore processes in steps Sa9 and Sa11. After the initialization process is performed, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the process is performed.

  When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c in the step of Sa8 and when the register is restored in the step of Sa11, the RAM destructive diagnosis fixed data set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM 41c is abnormal. If there is, the RAM destruction initialization start address is set for designating the address of the game RAM area to be initialized (Sa13). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state with reference to the input port 2 (Sa14).

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, a setting change process is performed. In the setting change process, the setting value is determined by operating the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 according to a predetermined procedure, and the setting key switch 37 is detected to be turned off. Is finished, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. In the setting change process, when the setting change process is started, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the setting change process is ended, A setting command (end) indicating that the setting change processing is to be ended is executed. In the setting change process, when the setting change process is terminated, the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change is designated, and the process returns to the step Sb47 of the main process. Then, the RAM initialization process is performed in step Sb47, so that the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all the game RAM areas is initialized. It has become so. In addition, it is good also as a structure which initializes all the game RAM area | regions except the stack area | region in use of RAM41c.

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). Further, a reel error counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of times that a rotation error of the reel is detected in the main process described later is cleared (Sa17). After that, by setting the address at the time of power interruption to the stack pointer SP based on the stored contents of the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is returned to the state at the time of power interruption (Sa18), and the port input processing is performed twice in succession (Sa19). , Sa20).

  In the port input process, input state data relating to the input state of detection signals and the like of various switches input to the parallel input port 511 (input data indicating the current input state of various switches, the previous and current input data being in the same state) Update data indicating that the fixed data has changed since the previous time). In a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, port input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided, and the input state data of various switches updated by the port input process is It is stored in a predetermined bit of a port input buffer predetermined for each type. In the port input processing, the detection state (ON state or OFF state) of various switches that are set to the input ports 0 to 2 of the parallel input port 511 is stored as input data in predetermined bits of the port input buffer. Also, the detection state (ON state or OFF state) in the previous and current port input processing is compared, and if the current input data and the previous input data are the same, the current input data detection state is indicated. On the other hand, if the final input data is different from the current input data, the previous final data is maintained. Further, when the final data is compared with the previous final data, when the final data changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the ON edge data indicating that the final data has changed from the OFF state to the ON state is displayed as the port input buffer 0. When the confirmed data changes from the ON state to the OFF state, OFF edge data indicating that the confirmed data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state is stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 Store in bits. Input data, fixed data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffer can be referred to from a game program and a non-game program.

  Further, in the initial setting process, the port input process is performed twice in succession, and when the port input process is performed thereafter, the input state of various switches after the initial setting process is performed, that is, the slot machine 1 Based on the input state of the various switches after the power supply to the switch is resumed, input state data related to the input state such as detection signals of the various switches is created, so that an unintended input state is specified. Can be prevented. In addition, in the port input process, the configuration may be such that the confirmed data is created based on the input data acquired by the port input process three times or more (for example, the input data of the current time, the previous time and the previous time). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by performing the port input process in the initial setting process continuously one time less than the number of times of the port input process necessary for creating the definite data. When the port input process is performed later, the input state data can be generated based on the input states of various switches after the initial setting process is performed.

  After performing port input processing in steps Sa19 and Sa20, it is determined whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is in an ON state by referring to a predetermined input port (Sa21), and reset / setting is performed. If the switch 38 is in the ON state, status data indicating that the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sa23).

  If it is determined in step Sa22 that the reset / setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after the status data is set in step Sa23, a sub-control unit 91 issues a return command indicating that the control state before power interruption has been restored. (Sa24), in a command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), a door command transmission flag indicating that a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sa25). In the command transmission process, a door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. When the door command transmission flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted. Regardless of whether or not the detection state has changed, a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted.

  Then, after setting the door command transmission flag in the step of Sa25, all the registers are returned to the state before the power interruption stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sa27), After completing the initial setting process and shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), the process returns to the process in the main process that was executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa15 that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, a game RAM initialization process is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is determined from the RAM destruction initialization start address set in the step Sa13. Initialize the region up to the end of. After that, after the value of the flag register in which the flag is set is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), similarly to the processes from Sa9 to Sa11, the non-game program includes the non-game program. The game RAM area initialization process is called (Sa30) to initialize all the non-game RAM areas in the RAM 41c, and then returns to the caller, and the registers saved in the step of Sa29 are restored (Sa31).

  After restoring the register in the step of Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sa33), and a RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c. A predetermined register is prepared (Sa34), the initial setting process is terminated, and an error process is entered.

  In the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is transferred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example, It is set as an error flag that can be referred to even in sensor monitoring processing described later. Further, control is performed so that the error code (E8) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM error error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and shifts to an error state, the power switch 39 is turned on while the setting key switch 37 is turned on to shift to the setting change state. By initializing all the game RAM areas, the data abnormality of the RAM 41c can be surely resolved and the error state can be canceled. On the other hand, if the power switch 39 is turned on without turning the setting key switch 37 on, an abnormality in the RAM 41c is detected again and an error state is entered again.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process first after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. In the initial setting process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is performed. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when started, the process is shifted to one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. When shifting to these processes, a command capable of specifying the type of process to be transferred is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), that is, a slot machine In the case of returning to the control state before the power supply to 1 is stopped, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 to start the setting change process and shift to the setting change state. When a setting command (start) is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 and error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c and the state shifts to an error state, the error command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In addition, after shifting from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 returns to a state in which the game can proceed through the setting change state, and the game can proceed. When returning to the state, a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is ended is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but the return command is not transmitted. In addition, after shifting to error processing due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the process is shifted to the setting change processing as described above, and the error state is canceled, so that the game can be returned to a state in which progress is possible. Even when the error process is ended and the game is returned to a state in which the game can proceed, the return command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the startup setting process included in the game program, and performs all the startup setting processes. The output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process included in the game program after performing the startup setting process. In the initial setting process, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, a non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. In the initial setting process, a RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The game RAM area is initialized by the game program, and the non-game The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-game program.

[About main processing]
The control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One period of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. The main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, a process that does not indicate that it is included in the non-game program is included in the game program. Some game programs called by the game program call non-game programs.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the main control unit 41 first uses the second save instruction described above to set the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored in the register to a game stack area in the game RAM area. By saving in order (Sb1), the above-described CALL instruction is used to call and execute the RT information output process included in the non-game program (Sb2).

  In the RT information output process, first, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. Similar to the case where the non-game RAM area initialization process is called, the stack pointer SP is changed from that for the game program to the non-game when the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. When changing to a program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process is as follows: May be different from the state of the register when calling.

  Thereafter, the information regarding the gaming state of the slot machine 1 set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area is referred to, and information regarding the gaming state (for example, the state of RT) is output from the output port 7 as an external output signal. Set. Then, the register values stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the RT information output process is started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area in the reverse order to the save time, and the order corresponds to the order. By setting the registers, all the registers are restored to the state when the RT information output process is started. After that, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the RT information output process is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output process is started, and the RT information output process is ended. As in the case where the above-mentioned non-game RAM area initialization process is ended, the RT information output process is started in order to end the RT information output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program after the values of all the registers saved at the time are restored, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction. The flag register state may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

  After the RT information output process is performed in the Sb2 step, the flag register values saved in the Sb1 step are sequentially used from the game stack area in the reverse order to the save using the above-described second return instruction. It returns by reading and setting to a flag register (Sb3). RT information output processing is performed by performing save processing and return processing of all registers in the RT information output processing in the step of Sb2, and flag register saving processing and recovery processing in the steps of Sb1 and Sb3. After that, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

  After the flag register is restored in step Sb3, a one-time interrupt process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt is performed once (Sb4). In the interrupt one-wait process, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted, and the process waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. Then, when it is specified that the timer interrupt process (main) has been performed once, the interrupt once wait process is terminated.

  By performing the one-wait interrupt processing, the processing that is performed after the one-wait interrupt processing can be performed in a state in which the time until the next timer interrupt processing (main) is performed is maximized. The timer interrupt is not unintentionally performed in the middle of a series of processes performed after the interrupt one-wait process. By performing the one-interrupt waiting process at the step Sb4, a timer interrupt is unintentionally performed during the process from the Sc1 step to the Sc10 step of the game start waiting process performed after the one-interrupt waiting process. The process from the step Sc1 to the step Sc10 can be performed as a series of processes.

  In addition, by performing the interrupt once wait process, the timer interrupt process is performed once, so that after each process included in the timer interrupt process is performed, the interrupt interrupt process is performed after the interrupt once wait process. A series of processes can be performed. For example, by performing a one-time interrupt process in step Sb4, the port input process described later included in the timer interrupt process is performed, and the game starts with the input data of various switches and sensors updated. Processing from the step Sc1 to the step Sc10 of the waiting process can be performed.

  Then, after the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, a game start waiting process is performed (Sb5), and the process from the end of the control of the previous one game to the start of the next one game is performed. In the game start waiting process, a process for setting the bet number according to the insertion of medals, etc. is performed, and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the specified number of bets is set, so that the next one game is Process to start.

  Then, an internal lottery process for determining whether or not winning is allowed (internal lottery) is performed (Sb6). In the internal lottery process, a winning is allowed based on a preset value (1-6) preset in the slot machine 1 or a random number value for internal lottery acquired at the same time as the start of the game by detection of the start switch 7 An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform (that is, whether or not derivation of the display result is permitted).

  Thereafter, similarly to the step of Sb1, using the above-described second save instruction, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area. (Sb7), the timer interrupt is disabled (Sb8), and the winning information output process included in the non-game program is performed using the above CALL instruction (Sb9). Is set to output information related to the lottery result from the output port.

  In the winning information output process, first, similarly to the RT information output process described above, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the LD instruction described above, and the non-game RAM area is read. Retreat to a predetermined area. After that, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read and set as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, so that the stack pointer SP is set. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, by using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register described above are saved in a non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. Let In addition, when the winning information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used to change the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the winning information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the winning information output process is determined by the game program receiving the winning information output process. May be different from the state of the register when calling.

  Then, referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, data that can identify the winning situation of the special role and the winning situation of the general role in the internal lottery is a non-game program described later A predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set so that it can be referred to from the test signal output process. Note that the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning information output processing are referred to in the test signal output processing described later and output as a test signal. ing.

  In the same manner as the RT information output process described above, the register values saved when the winning information output process was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the first return instruction described above. All registers are restored to the state when the information output process was started. Thereafter, when the winning information output process is started using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the information output process is started, and the winning information output process is terminated. In addition, in order to end the winning information output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after returning all the register values saved at the start of the winning information output process, the stack pointer When the SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register before and after the execution of the LD instruction is changed. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the winning information output process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the winning information output process is started.

  After the winning information output process is performed in step Sb9, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb10). Then, similarly to the step of Sb3, using the above-described second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb7 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the saving. By setting in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before the winning information output process is performed (Sb11). The winning information output process is performed by performing the saving process and restoring process of all the registers in the winning information output process in the step of Sb9 and the saving process and restoring process of the flag register in the steps of Sb7 and Sb11. After that, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

  After returning the register in step Sb11, the effect control process (Sb12), the freeze control setting process (Sb13), the control state command group transmission process (Sb14), and the game start command transmission process (Sb15) are sequentially performed. In the effect control process, an effect flag that is referred to when the main control unit 41 performs effect control is set. In the freeze control setting process, regarding the freeze control that delays the progress of the game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of a request for performing the freeze control is confirmed, and if there is a request, the type of freeze control and the freeze The control timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the control state command group transmission process, a control state command group including a plurality of commands that can specify various control states at the start of one game is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the game start command transmission process, a game start command capable of specifying that one game is started is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  After performing the game start command process in the step of Sa15, the freeze execution process for executing the freeze control based on the type and timing of the freeze control set in the RAM 41c in the step of Sb13 is performed (Sb16). In the freeze execution process, when it is set in step Sb13 that the freeze control is performed at the start of the game, the freeze control is executed to delay the game control over a predetermined period. In addition, when the type of freeze control with the effect using the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as the reel effect) is set as the type of freeze control, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are excited. Acceleration pattern for production as an excitation pattern (for example, an acceleration pattern that rotates in a direction different from the rotation of the reel in the game, a rotation that is slower than the rotation of the reel in the game, and starts rotating in the same direction as the rotation in the game The acceleration pattern to be oscillated, the acceleration pattern to vibrate the reel, etc.) are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed so that the reel effect is performed within the period during which the freeze control is performed.

  After performing the freeze control execution process in the step of Sb16, the waiting LED 19 indicating that the effect control is being performed is controlled to be in an ON state (lighted state) (Sb17), and the reel rotation start time in the previous game is started. One game time management timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to measure the elapsed time is referred to (Sb18), and one game is started from the reel rotation start time in the previous game based on the one game time management timer. Is determined (Sb19). If it is determined that the specified time for one game has not elapsed, the system waits until the specified time for one game elapses based on the timer for one game time management. After the specified time has elapsed, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set in the one game time management timer, and the elapsed time from the reel rotation start time is newly set. Is started (Sb20), the waiting LED 19 is controlled to be in an OFF state (light-off state) (Sb21), and a reel rotation start command that can specify that rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started is sub-controlled. A reel rotation start command transmission process to be transmitted to the unit 91 is performed (Sb22). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa19 that the specified time for one game has elapsed, the processing in steps Sb20 to Sb22 is immediately performed. The one game time management timer is subtracted every predetermined time after the predetermined value is set in the step of Sb20, and the specified time of one game from the start of reel rotation in the game (4. in this embodiment). When one second) elapses, it becomes 0, and it can be determined whether or not one game specified time has elapsed based on whether or not one game time management timer is zero. .

  After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in step Sa22, a normal acceleration pattern for controlling the rotation of the reel at a predetermined speed for gaming is used as an excitation pattern for the excitation control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. A predetermined area is set (Sb23), and a reel activation process for starting the rotation of the reel by performing excitation control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R based on the excitation pattern set in the RAM 41c is performed (Sb24).

  Then, a navigation notification process is performed (Sb25). In the navigation notification process, when the AT is controlled and the notification target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation number that can specify a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the notification target combination Is controlled so as to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, while if the AT is not controlled, the navigation number is controlled not to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  After the navigation notification process is performed in the step of Sb25, a reel stop initial setting process (Sb26) for setting various information necessary for the reel stop control according to the RT state and the lottery result of the internal lottery is performed. Then, freeze control processing is performed (Sb27), and if it is set in step Sb13 that freeze control is performed at the timing, the set type of freeze control is performed.

  After the freeze control process is performed in step Sb27, a reel stop control process for controlling the reel stop is performed (Sb28). In the reel stop control process, it is determined whether the reel whose rotation is being controlled is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. If there is a reel that is not rotated at a constant speed, a reel error is detected and the corresponding reel is detected. An excitation pattern for accelerating the reel to a constant speed is set, and control is performed so that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the reception of the stop operation of the reels under rotation control is validated, and the operation waits until the stop operation is performed by the stop switch. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which the stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which the stop operation is valid), a reel for which a valid stop operation has been performed. Is controlled to stop at a predetermined stop position based on information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reels under rotation control, and the reel stop process is terminated by stopping the rotation of all the reels.

  After the reel stop process is terminated, a freeze control process is performed (Sb29). If it is set in step Sb13 that the freeze control is performed at the timing, the type of freeze set. Take control.

  Thereafter, RT state check processing (Sb30) and winning determination processing (Sb31) are performed. In the RT state check process, it is determined whether or not the combination of RT transition symbols accompanying the transition of the RT state is stopped on the reel. The current RT state being updated is updated to an RT state corresponding to the combination of the RT transition symbols. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Then, after the winning determination process in the step of Sa31 is performed, an insertion / payout error check process for determining whether an abnormality related to the insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 or an abnormality related to the payout of medals from the hopper is detected. (Sa32).

  In the insertion / payout error check process, a payout error flag indicating that an abnormality has been detected in the transition of the signal of the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal payout signal), or a signal of the input medal sensor 31 (hereinafter referred to as a medal). It is determined whether or not an input error flag indicating that an abnormality has been detected in the transition of the input signal (which may be referred to as an input signal) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a payout error flag and an input error flag are set. If not, the input / output error check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the payout error flag is set, an error code (E4) indicating that an abnormality of the medal payout signal is detected is prepared in a predetermined register, and error processing is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the insertion error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If the insertion error flag is set, an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality in the medal insertion signal is detected. Is prepared in a predetermined register and error processing is performed.

  In the error processing, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E4, E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E4, E5) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Set as an error flag that can be referenced in other processes. Further, control is performed so that the error code (E4, E5) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E4, E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E4) is prepared in a predetermined register and shifted to the error state, the detection state of the payout sensor 34c is OFF and the reset / setting switch 38 or reset is set as a condition for canceling the error state. It waits until the switch 23 is turned on, and when the release condition is satisfied, an error command (release) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and error processing is performed. To return to the input / output error check process. When the error code (E5) is prepared in the register and the state is shifted to the error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF and the reset / setting switch is used as a condition for canceling the error state. 38 or until the reset switch 23 is turned ON, and an error command (release) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 when the release condition is satisfied. Then, the error process is terminated and the process returns to the input / output error check process.

  Then, when the error process that has been transferred when the abnormality of the medal payout signal is detected and the error process that has been transferred because of the abnormality of the medal insertion signal is completed, an error execution flag indicating that the error process has been executed Is set in a predetermined register, and the input / output error check processing is terminated. If the payout error flag or the input error flag is not set and the process does not proceed to the error process, the input / output error check process is terminated without setting the error execution flag.

  After the error check process (Sb32) is performed in step Sb32, the process waits for one interrupt (Sb33) and waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt process (main) has been performed once, the interrupt one-wait process is terminated.

  After waiting for one interrupt at the step Sb33, the operation result is stored in the register included in the main control unit 41 using the above-described second return instruction, similarly to the step Sb3 and the step Sb7. The flag register value is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb34), the timer interrupt is disabled (Sb35), and the above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to make a non-game The ratio monitoring data included in the program is processed (Sb36).

  As described above, after performing the interrupt once waiting process in the step Sb33, the time until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed is maximized by performing the role ratio monitor data process (Sb36). In the secured state, the ratio monitoring data processing can be performed, and it is possible to prevent a timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the ratio monitoring data processing. Also, in step Sb35, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, the role monitor data processing is performed in a state where the timer interrupt is disabled, and in the subsequent step Sb37, the timer interrupt prohibition setting is canceled, It is possible to reliably prevent an unintentional timer interrupt from occurring during the role monitor data processing. In step Sb33, a timer interrupt process (main) is performed by performing a one-time interrupt process before setting the timer interrupt to the disabled state in order to perform the role monitoring data process, thereby causing the timer interrupt process (main) to be performed. When the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb35 to Sb37), the timer interrupt timing can be prevented, and when the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb35 to Sb37), the timer interrupt is performed. With the timing, when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is canceled, the timer interrupt is performed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is not performed at an unintended timing.

  Further, by setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited in the step Sb35, as in the case of setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step Sb8 described above, the ratio monitor is used from the time when the flag register is saved in the step Sb34. The timer interrupt processing is performed during the period from when data processing is started until the processing for saving all register values is performed, so that the state of the register is changed from the state when the flag register is saved. It is designed not to end up.

  In the role ratio monitor data processing, first, similarly to the RT information output processing described above, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the LD instruction described above, and the non-game It is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM area. Thereafter, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, whereby the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game. Set for the program. Then, by using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved in a non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. The LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program in association with the role monitor data processing included in the non-game program being called from the game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the role monitor data processing is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the role monitor data processing is determined by the game program. It may be different from the state of the register when calling the role monitor data processing.

  Thereafter, each state count process included in the non-game program is performed, and a predetermined period (for example, a period from the current game to 6000 games before, a period from the current game to 175,000 games before, for the player) Data relating to the number of medals to be paid out in an advantageous section (advantageous section, etc.) is updated.

  Then, by using the first return instruction described above, the register values stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the ratio monitoring data processing is started are not played in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all registers are returned to the state when the role monitor data processing is started. Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the role ratio monitoring data process is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the role ratio monitoring data processing is started, and the role ratio monitoring data processing is ended. In addition, in order to finish the role monitor data processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, all register values saved at the start of the role monitor data processing are restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from a non-game program to a game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and before and after the LD instruction is executed. As a result, the state of the flag register may change. That is, the state of the register when the role ratio monitoring data processing is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the role ratio monitoring data processing is started.

  After performing the role monitor data processing in the step of Sb36, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb37). Then, similarly to the step Sb3 and the step Sb11, the value of the flag register saved in the step Sb34 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order to the save using the second return instruction described above. By setting in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before performing the role monitor data processing (Sb38). By performing the saving process and restoring process for all registers in the role ratio monitoring data process in step Sb36 and the flag register saving process and restoration process in steps Sb34 and Sb38, the role ratio monitoring data After the processing is performed, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

  After the flag register is restored in step Sb38, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be in an OFF state (light-off state) (Sb39), the replaying flag indicating that the replaying is in progress is cleared (Sb40), and the game auxiliary display After the display of the navigation number on the device 12 is cleared (Sb41), a medal payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning generated as a result of the game is performed (Sb42).

  In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals determined in advance for each winning combination are given to the player according to the generated winning, and the number of medals to be given is added to the credit, and the credit is limited to the upper limit number ( In this embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out medals for the amount not added to the credit from the medal payout opening 9.

  After the medal payout process is performed in the step Sb42, the freeze control process is performed (Sb43), and in the step Sb13, if it is set that the freeze control is performed at the timing, the type of the set type is set. Perform freeze control.

  When the game end setting process is performed (Sb44), it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the re-gamer is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the symbol combination of the re-gamer is stopped Is a process for setting the number of bets for replaying in the next game (in this embodiment, 3 is set as a replay medal in the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. ), A process of setting a re-playing flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the replaying LED 20 to an ON state (lighted state), and the like.

  Then, after performing a ball control process for performing the ball control at the end of the game (Sb45), the start address of the area of the RAM 41c to be initialized at the end of the game is set (Sb46), and the RAM initialization process is performed. (Sb47), the area from the head address to the end of the RAM 41c is initialized.

  Then, after clearing a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and indicating a lottery result of the internal lottery in the game (Sb48), a sub-control unit 91 sends a game end command that can specify that one game has ended. The game end command transmission process to be transmitted is performed (Sb49), the process returns to the step Sb1, and the steps Sb1 to Sb49 are repeated. When the main process is completed, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

  As described above, the main process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is a process included in the game program to a process included in the non-game program, for example, a non-game RAM area initialization process, a medal sensor process, a role monitor. Invoicing data processing, non-game related processing, etc. When calling a process included in a non-game program, every time a process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the value of the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is played on the game program side of the caller. All stored in the stack area and saved, the value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program is saved in the non-game RAM area on the called non-game program side, and all the main control unit 41 has The register value is stored in the non-game stack area and saved. Then, a process corresponding to the called non-game program (for example, a process for initializing a non-game RAM area in a non-game RAM area initialization process, a medal sensor check process in a medal sensor process described later, and a role monitor described later) Each state count process in the data process, a sensor monitoring process in a non-game related process described later, a test signal output process, a medal passage time timer update process, a role monitor display data selection process, and the like) are performed.

  In addition, after processing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 sets all register values saved in the non-game stack area at the start of the non-game program on the non-game program side to the corresponding register. And the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-game RAM area at the start of the non-game program is set in the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is restored to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before the non-game program is called on the calling game program side is stored in the corresponding flag register. Processing to read and restore the register to the state before calling the non-game program It is made as to do.

  In addition, when performing various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program using the above-described CALL instruction or the like. When each process corresponding to the non-game program is completed, the game program is returned to the calling game program.

  The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of this embodiment can call the RT information output process, the winning information output process, the role monitor data process, etc. included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program. The processes included in the non-game program called by the main process (RT information output process, winning information output process, role monitoring data process, etc.) are first called when the predetermined process is started. The LD instruction is used by the main process that is the game program of the caller to read the value of the stack pointer SP and save it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the previous non-game using the LD instruction. The value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the program is read and indicated by the current stack pointer SP. By setting as performs the process of setting the stack pointer SP for non game program.

  The non-game program called by the main process uses the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, and then uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to store all the registers in the RAM 41c. A process of saving to a predetermined area is performed. At this time, since the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register before and after the execution of the LD instruction is changed. The state of the flag register when the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, on the non-game program side, the registers other than the flag register among all the registers saved using the first save instruction are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. The flag register may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

  The non-game program called by the main process uses the first return instruction (POP ALL) to terminate the non-game program and return to the main process included in the game program. After all the register values saved at the start of the process are restored, the LD pointer is used to set the stack pointer SP for the game program and return to the main process. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the flag register when returning may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, of all the registers when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program, while the flag register The main process may be different from the state when the non-game program is called.

  Thus, on the non-game program side, the state of the flag register saved and restored using the first save instruction and the first return instruction is the state when the main process calls the non-game program, that is, the main process. May be different from the state of the flag register used by the player, and the non-game program side protects the state when the main process calls the non-game program for all the registers including the flag register included in the main control unit 41. Difficult to do.

  On the other hand, in the main process of this embodiment, when calling a process (RT information output process, winning information output process, role monitor data process, etc.) included in the non-game program, the corresponding non-game program Each time a process is called, the main processing side of the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store the flag register state of the registers included in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area and save it. When returning from the processing included in the non-game program to the main processing, the main processing side uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to return the state of the flag register to the game stack area. Let Thereby, in the main process, when returning from the process included in the called non-game program, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state saved when the non-game program is called on the main process side. Of the registers restored by the non-game program side, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as the state when the main process calls the non-game program, while the main process is the non-game program for the flag register. Even when there is a difference from the state at the time of calling, when the main process returns from the non-game program, the state of all registers can be returned to the state when the main process called the non-game program It is like that.

  The process included in the non-game program called from the main process included in the game program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to set the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the non-game stack area. Using the first return instruction (POP ALL), the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is restored to the state saved in the non-game stack area, while the main processing is performed using the second return instruction (POP ALL). Using PUSH AF), the state of only the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area, and the state of the flag register is set in the game stack area using the second return instruction (POP AF). It returns to the evacuated state. As a result, the game program uses the 1-byte second save instruction and the second return instruction to save and restore the state of the flag register. Therefore, the 2-byte first save instruction and the first return used in the non-game program are used. The capacity of the game program can be reduced as compared with the case where the state of the register is saved and restored using an instruction. Further, in the game program, the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers is saved to the game stack area using the second save instruction, so that the state of all the registers using the first save instruction used in the non-game program The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced as compared with the case where the game is saved.

  In the process included in the game program such as the main process of the present embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for the determination for proceeding various processes based on the program.

  In the main process of this embodiment, when calling a process included in a non-game program (RT information output process, winning information output process, role monitor data process, etc.), the timer interrupt is disabled and the process is called. When returning from the main process to the main process, the timer interrupt is set to “permitted” so that the timer interrupt is disabled during the period during which the process included in the non-game program is being executed.

  In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling processing included in the non-game program (winning information output processing, role monitoring data processing, etc.), the timer interrupt is disabled after saving the flag register. When returning from the called process to the main process, the flag register is returned after setting the timer interrupt to be enabled.

  In the main process etc. included in the game program of the present embodiment, it is possible to call the winning information output process, medal sensor process, role monitoring data process, etc. included in the non-game program. The included process is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state in which a sufficient time until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed is executed. All the processing included in the processing is completed within the time until it is displayed, but is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state where sufficient time is not secured until the next timer interrupt processing (main) is performed. If the process is not complete, all processes included in the process are not completed within the time until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed. It is composed of timer interrupt processing capacity of a program that might be timing (main) is performed.

  In the game program of this embodiment (main process, game start waiting process, etc.), when calling a non-game program, the interrupt program is waited once and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. A series of processes including a process for calling a non-game program is performed to call a non-game program. That is, the non-game program is executed in a state in which sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt process (main) is performed by calling and executing the non-game program in response to the interrupt one-wait process. It is like that.

[About the game waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game start waiting process is a subroutine that is included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the game start waiting process, first, a medal insertion number display process is performed (Sc1), and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the number of medals already inserted in the slot machine 1 are turned on (lighted state). To control. Thereafter, an error code (E1) that can specify that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (Sc2), and a predetermined port input buffer is referred to based on the determined data of the full tank sensor 35a. It is then determined whether the hopper tank 34a is full (Sc3).

  If it is determined in step Sc3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, error processing is performed (Sc4). In the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. In addition, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E1) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Set as an error flag. Further, control is performed so that the error code (E1) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state cancel condition corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the state is shifted to the error state, the process waits until the confirmed data of the full sensor 35a is turned off, and the confirmed data of the full sensor 35a is turned off. Then, an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Sc5.

  If it is determined in step Sc3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, or if error processing in step Sc4 is completed, the value of the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value. Read into the register (Sc5). The re-game medal counter is set to a value corresponding to the result of the previous game by the setting process at the end of the game in the previous main process, and the re-game player wins a prize in the previous game. If a value corresponding to the specified number of bets required to play a game (for example, 3) is set, but no re-game is given in the previous game Is set to 0.

  Thereafter, the replay medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sc6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter read in the step of Sc5 is larger than 0, that is, whether or not a regame is given. (Sc7) When a re-game is given, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Sc8). In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter is set to the betting number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighted state) to set the specified number of betting numbers (3 in this embodiment). Notify that is set. In addition, an insertion number command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet amount is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  After performing the medal insertion execution process when the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in the step of Sc7, that is, when it is determined that no replay is given, and when the replay is given in the step of Sc8 Performs medal care permission setting processing (Sc9). In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 The medal care permission flag indicating that the insertion of the medal is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  After the medal care permission setting process is performed in the step of Sc9, a process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sc10). By performing a one-time interrupt process, timer interrupt processing (main) is performed and the detection status of various switches, LED lighting status, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection status of these various switches Then, the subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion / payout error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, operation input reception processing described later) can be performed.

  After the waiting process is performed once in the step of Sc10 and the timer interruption is performed once, the same input / output error check processing as the step of Sb32 of the main processing described above is performed (Sc11). Then, based on whether or not an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not error processing has been executed in the error check processing (Sc12).

  If it is determined that the error check process has been executed in the error check process in the step Sc12, the process returns to the step Sc10 and the processes in the steps Sc10 to Sc12 are performed again. Thereafter, each process of steps Sc10 to Sc12 is performed in a state where no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal and the transition of the medal insertion signal, so that the error execution flag is not set and the step of Sc12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc12 that the error execution flag is not set, medal insertion signal processing is performed (Sc13). In the medal insertion signal process, the medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. When a normal medal insertion is detected, a medal is accepted for setting the bet amount and credit, and the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the insertion of an abnormal medal is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. Thereafter, the error state is canceled and the error processing is ended, whereby the medal insertion signal processing is ended.

  After the medal insertion signal process is performed in the step of Sc13, the operation input reception process is performed in which the operation of the various switches is validated and the operation of the switch in which the operation is validated is performed. (Sc14).

  In the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, the operation is accepted by the MAXBET switch 6. Activate. Further, when a medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is validated. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

  Further, in the operation input reception process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. Thereafter, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off to switch the medal flow path to the medal payout exit 9 side. Further, when an operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected in a state where the operation by the setting key switch 37 is valid, a setting value display process for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when an operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, a settlement process is performed in which the medals stored in the credit are returned to the player. In addition, when an operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in a state where the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, the number of medals up to a prescribed number is set as the bet number within a possible range based on the credit, and the bet number is set. A process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch in which the operation is detected, the operation input receiving process is terminated.

  After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sc14, it is determined whether an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sc15). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and a valid operation by the start switch 7 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step Sc16 to perform LED display processing for controlling the lighting state of the start valid LED 18. .

  In the LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective by the operation input reception process of step Sc14, when the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start valid LED 18 is turned on. When the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective, and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in an OFF state (light-off state), and whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid is notified by the lighting state of the start valid LED 18.

  In step Sc15, when it is determined that a start flag is set in a predetermined register and a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for internal lottery is obtained from the random number circuit 42, and the RAM 41c A predetermined area is set (Sc17). Thereafter, the medal insertion state data capable of specifying the set bet number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc18), the start valid LED 18 is set to the OFF state (dark state) (Sc19), and the medal care permission flag is set. Clear from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc20), control to clear the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sc21), end the game start waiting process, and return to the main process. Thereafter, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random value acquired in the step of Sc17, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started in response to the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. One game will be started.

  Thus, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, the medal insertion signal process included in the game program can be called. When the medal insertion signal process is called, the timer interrupt process (main) is 1 The medal insertion signal process is called after the waiting process is performed once for the interrupt to wait until it is repeated. As will be described later, in the timer interrupt process (main), a port input process for updating input data of sensors including the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed. After performing 1, the medal insertion signal process is called to perform a process based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt process (main) in the medal sensor process called by the medal insertion signal process. It is possible.

  Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, which is called from the game start waiting process, will be described with reference to FIG. The medal insertion signal process is a subroutine that is included in the game program and called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the medal insertion signal process, first, a medal care permission flag indicating that the medal insertion permission from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted in the medal care permission setting process of the above-described game start waiting process is set. It is determined whether or not (Sd1). If the medal care permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal process is terminated and the process returns to the caller game start waiting process. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sd2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data that can specify the state transition of the detection signals of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals), and the medal sensor check included in the non-game program. By the processing, the medal sensors 31a to 31c are updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data and the like, and set to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c.

  The detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in the step Sd2. It is determined whether or not a medal is passing (Sd3). When it is determined that the medal is not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state (Sd4), and the medal inserted from the medal inserting unit 4 is selected as the medal selector. A hopper provided in the housing 1a with a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 so as to flow down the medal inflow passage 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b in the 29 and guided to the hopper tank 34a. Control is performed so as to switch to the tank 34a side. Thereafter, the insertion request LED 17 indicating that a medal can be inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is controlled to be in an ON state (Sd5), and the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared (Sd6).

  Here, when setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer sets at least the output of the control signal for turning the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, and then the flow path switching solenoid 30 30 is actuated and the passage of the switching time until the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is actually switched to the medal payout exit 9 side is counted. This is a timer for controlling to ignore the input signal. In the medal insertion signal neglect timer, when the control signal output of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set in order to switch the flow path of the medal, at least the control signal output setting of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is actually set. A predetermined time (in this embodiment, 504 milliseconds) until the medal flow path is switched is set. Thereafter, the medal insertion signal ignore timer is subtracted and updated by timer interrupt processing (main), and when it becomes 0, it can be specified that the switching time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step Sd3 that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and after the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared in step Sd6, the above-described second retraction instruction is used. Then, after the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sd7), a timer interrupt is issued. The prohibition is set (Sd8), and the medal sensor process included in the non-game program is called by using the above CALL instruction (Sd9).

  In the medal sensor process, first, in the same manner as the RT information output process described above, the current stack pointer is determined from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program using the LD instruction described above. The value of the address indicated by the SP is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. The flag register is used by changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program when the medal sensor process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. The second zero flag TZ is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor process is the game program called the medal sensor process. Sometimes the state of the register is different.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. If the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has successfully passed the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c or the medal is the insertion medal. The medal passage state reference data (medal detection) indicating that the sensor 31a to 31c has started to pass through the detection range A, and the medal passage state in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the previous determination. The medal passage state reference data (no change) indicating that the time has not changed is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Thereafter, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, medal related error data that can specify an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality relating to the medal insertion signal has been detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

  Then, in the same manner as the RT information output process described above, the register values saved when the medal sensor process is started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the first return instruction described above, and the medal sensor Restore all registers to the state they were in when processing started. Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the medal sensor process is started is read and set as a value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor process is started, and the winning information output process is ended. In order to end the medal sensor process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after returning all register values saved at the start of the medal sensor process, the stack pointer SP is set. When changing from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register before and after the execution of the LD instruction is changed. May change. That is, the state of the register when the medal sensor process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the medal sensor process is started.

  After the medal sensor process is performed in the step Sd9, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sd10), and the value of the register saved in the step Sd7 is saved using the second return instruction described above. By sequentially reading from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before the winning information output process is performed (Sd11). After the medal sensor process is performed by performing the save process and the return process of all the registers in the medal sensor process in the step of Sd9 and the save process and the return process of the flag register in the steps of Sd7 and Sd11. In this case, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

  Thereafter, referring to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sd12), and it is determined whether or not an error code (E5) is set (Sd13). When the error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in the predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sd14), it controls to the error state that disables the progress of the game.

  In the error process, the error process is controlled to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying an error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Set as an error flag. Further, control is performed so that the error code (E5) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and shifted to an error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF and the reset / setting switch is used as a condition for canceling the error state. It waits without performing control which advances a game until it becomes true that 38 or the reset switch 23 will be in ON state. When the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the medal insertion signal processing is returned.

  When it is determined that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal related error data in the step of Sd13, and after the error processing of the step of Sd14 is completed, it is set to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The medal passing state reference data is referred to (Sd15), and the contents of the medal passing state reference data are determined (Sd16, Sd17).

  If it is determined in step Sd16 that medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal process is terminated and the process returns to the game start waiting process. If it is determined in step Sd17 that medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, the process proceeds to step Sd18, and in step Sd17, medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set. If it is determined that the medal passage state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sd21.

  If it is determined in step Sd17 that medal passage state reference data (medal passage) is set, an insertion state determination process is performed (Sd18). In the insertion status determination process, a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum credit value of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final acceptance flag that can specify whether or not the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the insertion state determination process is ended.

  After performing the insertion situation determination process in step Sd18, when it is determined that the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final acceptance flag set in the predetermined register. Then, the medal blocker off process is performed (Sd20), and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, so that the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is moved from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout exit 9 side. By switching, the medal inserted into the medal insertion unit 4 after the medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c is controlled to be returned from the medal payout opening 9 through the medal return channel 29c. In the medal blocker off process, the flow range switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, and then the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area is referenced to detect the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c. If the medal is passing through the detection range A, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds). ) To start measuring a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. As a result, in the sensor monitoring process described later for a predetermined time after the medal blocker off process ends, abnormality of the medal insertion signal is determined regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal, and sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set. There is no such thing as being done.

  After the medal blocker off process is performed in step Sd20, the medal insertion signal process is terminated and the process returns to the game start waiting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal to be accepted next is not the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final acceptance flag, the medal insertion signal process is terminated without performing the medal blocker off process, and the game start waiting process Return to.

  When it is determined that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set and the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is not set in step Sd17, the predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. Then, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is acquired (Sd21), and it is determined whether or not the confirmed data is in the ON state (Sd22). If it is determined that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sd23), and the input data is turned OFF. It is determined whether it is in a state (Sd24).

  If it is determined in step Sd19 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is determined in step Sd20. When it is determined that it is not in the OFF state, that is, when a medal is passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b or when there is no medal in the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal insertion signal processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd22 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and in step Sd24, it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal receiving channel. In 29b, when the inserted medal sensor 31c has passed the detection position where the medal can be detected, the medal insertion process is performed (Sd25).

  In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a prescribed number of bets has been set with reference to the currently set bet numbers stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, when the specified number of bets is not set, 1 is added to the current bet number, and when the specified number of bets is already set, 1 is added to the credit counter.

  After performing the medal insertion process in the step of Sd25, the medal care permission setting process is performed (Sd26), and the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) based on the credit counter. Then, a medal care permission flag indicating that the medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  If the medal care permission flag is not set after performing the medal care permission setting process in the step of Sd26, this corresponds to a predetermined value (in this example, 504 milliseconds) determined in the medal insertion signal ignore timer. Value) is set to start measuring a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignoring timer (Sd28), and the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended without setting the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. The medal insertion signal ignoring timer is subtracted every predetermined time after a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) is set in the step of Sd28, and a predetermined predetermined time ( In the present embodiment, when 4.1 seconds) elapses, it becomes 0, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal insertion signal ignore timer is 0. ing.

  As described above, in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program, the medal sensor process included in the non-game program can be called. When the medal sensor process is called, the value of the flag register is set to the game stack of the RAM 41c. When the evacuation is performed in the area and the medal insertion signal process is restored from the medal sensor process, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

  In the medal insertion signal process included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and the medal sensor process is performed. When returning to the insertion signal processing, the timer interruption is set to be permitted, so that the timer interruption is prohibited during execution of the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program.

  Also, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, the value of the flag register is saved and then the timer interrupt is set to prohibition, and the medal sensor processing Is supposed to do.

  Also, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is performed with the timer interrupt prohibited, the timer is returned when returning from medal sensor processing to medal insertion signal processing. After setting the interrupt to permit, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

  The medal insertion signal process is a process called by the game start waiting process. As described above, in the game start waiting process, the interrupt one-wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once is performed. After the execution, the medal insertion signal processing is called. Also, in the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion signal processing is started, and after predetermined processing is performed, the timer interrupt is disabled and the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called and performed. Yes. Thus, in the gaming machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, the game start waiting process calls the medal insertion signal process after performing the interrupt once waiting process, and performs the medal sensor process in the medal insertion signal process. The timer interrupt process (main) is performed by at least one interrupt waiting process in the game start waiting process, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input process included in the timer interrupt process (main). Medal sensor processing is performed.

[About medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The control contents of the medal sensor process and the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The medal sensor process is a subroutine that is included in the non-game program and called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is a subroutine that is included in the non-game program and called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the medal sensor process, first, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area using the above-described LD instruction. And retreat (Se1). Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, a predetermined value in the non-game stack area (a value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP, so that the stack pointer SP is set to non-game. Set for the program (Se2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved in a non-game stack area in a predetermined order (Se3). Thereafter, a medal sensor check process included in the non-game program is performed (Se4).

  After performing the medal sensor check process in the Se4 step, the register values saved in the Se3 step are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the above-described first return instruction, and the winning information output process is performed. After returning all the registers to the state when they were started (Se5), using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP stored and saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Se1 is By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor process is started (Se6), the medal sensor process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller medal insertion signal process.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the medal sensor check process, first, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the RAM 41c are cleared (Sf1, Sf2). The medal passage state reference data is data that can specify the passage state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as the processing result of the medal sensor check process. Based on the input data of 31c and the like, it is determined that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, or the medal has started to pass the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It can be determined that it has been detected that this has been detected, and that it has been determined that the medal detection state by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passage state reference data is medal passage state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed since the previous determination. In the medal-related error reference data, an abnormality (error code E5) related to the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals) is detected as the processing result of the medal sensor check process. This is data that can be specified. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data are set in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, so that they can be referenced and updated by the non-game program, but can only be referred from the game program. is there.

  After clearing the medal passage state reference data and the medal related error reference data in the steps Sf1 and Sf2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sf3), and the medal is inserted. Correct data for determining whether or not the signal state transition is normal is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the ROM 41b (Sf4), and a medal center check process before and after the previous time with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The medal insertion signal state transition data stored in is acquired (Sf5).

  Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in step Sf5 and the correct / wrong data acquired in step Sf4 are compared to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Sf6).

  When it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct in the step Sf6, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the step Sf3. The medal insertion signal state transition data is created and stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sf7).

  Then, referring to the medal passage time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sf8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in the step of Sf7, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is determined whether the current and previous detection states are OFF (Sf9, Sf10). The medal passage time timer is a timer that measures the duration of a period in which it is determined that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, time measurement is started when the medal insertion signal is turned on, and then updated by timer interrupt processing (main).

  When it is determined in the steps Sf9 and Sf10 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF and the previous detection state is not OFF, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. If there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the medal that has been in the detection range, the medal passage time referred to in step Sf8 It is determined whether or not the timer is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passing time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Sf11). Note that the normal passing time range is a measured value of the time required for a medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the inserting in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in this embodiment, the range is from 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sf11 that the medal passage time timer is not less than the shortest value in the normal passage time range, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in step Sf7 is cleared (Sf12), and the medal passage time timer is cleared. After clearing (Sf13), the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) indicating that the medal has successfully passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, the medal sensor check process ends. On the other hand, if the medal passage time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passage time range, the process proceeds to step Sf19 described later.

  When it is determined in the steps Sf9 and Sf10 that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both OFF, that is, no medal passes through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. When the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c have not changed from the previous determination, the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step Sf1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change). The state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is maintained, and the medal sensor check process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Sf9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not OFF, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c If it is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the medal passage time timer referred to in step Sf8 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passage time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sf15).

  If it is determined in step Sf15 that the medal passage time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, it is determined whether or not the medal passage time timer is operating (Sf16). When the medal passage time timer is not in operation, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. In the case where the time measurement by the medal passage time timer has not yet started, the medal passage time timer is set to 0 and started (Sf17), and then the medal is inserted into the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passage state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has detected that it has started passing through the detection range A is set in a predetermined area of the non-game area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sf15 that the medal passage time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the process proceeds to step Sf19 described later. If it is determined in step Sf16 that the medal passage time timer is operating, that is, the medal has passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are kept on. If the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step of Sf1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is maintained in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the medal passing state is maintained. The sensor check process ends. The medal passage time timer is set to 0 in the step of Sf17 and started, and then added every predetermined time by the timer interrupt process. After the timer is set to 0 in the step of Sf17 The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time from when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c are turned on is counted by the medal passage time timer.

  If it is determined in step Sf6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct, if it is determined in step Sf11 that the medal passage time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passage time range, the medal passage time timer in step Sf15. Is determined to have exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, medal related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Sf19) After clearing the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sf7 (Sf20), clearing the medal passage time timer and stopping the time measurement (Sf21), the medal sensor check process To return to the medal sensor process. When the medal related error reference data (E5) is set in step Sf19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, the medal related error reference is subsequently performed in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), the error state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in determining whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition is correct in step Sf6 of the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program, inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 (inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c). When it is detected that the medal has started to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal is set. The transition in which the sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. The medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

  When the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 detect that the medal has passed the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the inserted medal is set. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and the inserted medal sensor 1 from the ON state. After the OFF state, the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the transition from the inserted medal sensor 2 to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. The medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

  In the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, and it is determined that any of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data ( Detection) is set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is first changed from the OFF state to the ON state, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, so that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct. When the inserted medal sensor 1 is turned on, medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

  Further, when it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and all the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set. It will be. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal transition Since it is determined that the state data is correct, when the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct and the insertion medal sensors 2 and 3 are turned off, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is obtained. Will be set.

  In the medal insertion signal process included in the game program, after determining that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set in the steps Sd16 and Sd17, the input of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 is performed in the steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to a subsequent medal insertion process or the like. That is, when medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set by the medal sensor check process, the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected. An input is detected.

[About data processing for role monitoring]
The control content of the role ratio monitor data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The role ratio monitoring data process is a subroutine that is included in the non-game program and called in the main process included in the game program. In addition, the role ratio monitoring data process calls each state count process which is a subroutine included in the non-game program, and each state count process further calls a role ratio update process which is a subroutine included in the non-game program. It is like that.

  The main control unit 41 displays the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout ratio as a ratio display and a credit indicator 11 constituted by a two-digit 7-segment display and a game auxiliary display. The display 12 is controlled. The credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are displays for displaying information according to the progress of the game, and since the ratio display cannot be displayed at all times, the game store is in a situation where no game is being performed. The ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the store clerk.

  Specifically, when the game is not being performed, the normally locked front door 1b is unlocked with a key held by a store clerk at the amusement store and opened, and is provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 to start display of the ratio display.

  In addition, the ratio display is composed of four alphanumeric characters consisting of the upper two digits of the abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display and the lower two digits of the ratio. The display content is displayed on the credit display 11 and the display content of the lower two digits is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the ratio display is displayed by switching the display in a predetermined display order every predetermined time from the start of the ratio display.

  With the ratio display displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the front door 1b is closed, the medal is inserted into the slot machine 1, an error is generated, the setting key switch 37 is operated, the settlement switch 10 Is switched to the original display content that was displayed before the ratio display was displayed, and the ratio display is terminated.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the setting process at the end of the game of the main process (step Sb44 in FIG. 12) according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After the processing is performed, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the role ratio monitoring data processing included in the non-game program is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the role monitor data processing, first, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is determined in the non-game RAM area. The area is stored and saved (Sg1), and then a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP using the LD instruction. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sg2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved in a non-game stack area in a predetermined order (Sg3). Then, after each state count process (Sg4) included in the non-game program is executed, the register values saved in the step of Sg3 are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the first return instruction described above. After all the registers are restored to the state when the role ratio monitoring data processing is started (Sg5), the LD instruction is used to store and save in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sg1. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP in the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the role monitor data processing is started (Sg6), and the role monitor data processing is ended. Returning to the main process of the calling source, the process proceeds to step Sb37. Thereafter, in the main process, the timer interrupt is permitted (Sb37), and the subsequent process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in each state count process, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games can be added (Sh1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area and can be counted up to 16777215 games as an upper limit.

  If the total cumulative number of games cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sh22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added as a game has been played (Sh2 to Sh4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling a subroutine of 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sh4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sh4). If the total cumulative number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sh7. When the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the upper limit has been reached is set in the total cumulative count stop flag (Sh5, Sh6), and the process proceeds to step Sh7. In the above-described step of Sh1, it is determined with reference to the total cumulative count stop flag whether the total cumulative number of games can be added.

  In steps from Sh7, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0-5999 games, in the range of 6000-174999 games, or in the range of 175000 games or more (Sh7-Sh20). Depending on the result of the determination, values indicating the respective ranges are set as lighting identification segments (Sh8, Sh18, Sh19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, after executing the combination ratio update process (Sh22) included in the non-game program, the process returns to the combination ratio monitor data process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the accessory ratio update process, first, 1 is added to the number of games for determining the number of games (Si1). Here, 1 is added to the determination game number counter described later. Next, the number of winning medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of winning in this game is added (Si2, Si3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the total payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

  The cumulative buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte bonus payout counter. When a prize is generated and a medal is paid out in the game, each counter counts. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value.

  Similarly to the cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative buffer 2 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte bonus payout counter. When a prize is generated and a medal is paid out in the game, each counter counts. Is done. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game that starts counting is shifted from the cumulative buffer 1 by 2000 games.

  The cumulative buffer 3 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter in the same manner as the cumulative buffer 1 and the cumulative buffer 2, and when a prize is generated in the game and medals are paid out, respectively. The counter is counted. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the games for which counting is started are shifted from the accumulated buffer 1 and 4000 games, and the accumulated buffer 1 and 2000 games.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number can be added (Si4). If the total accumulated payout number cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Si10. When the total cumulative payout number can be added, the number of winning medals is added to the total cumulative payout number. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total accumulated payout number has reached the upper limit (Si7). If the total accumulated payout number has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step Si10. When the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the upper limit value has been reached is set in the total cumulative count stop flag (Si8, Si9), and the process proceeds to step Si10. Whether or not the total cumulative payout number can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag, and when the total cumulative game number reaches the upper limit and when the total cumulative payout number reaches the upper limit. The same flag is used when

  In the steps of Si10 and Si11, it is determined whether or not an accessory is operating in the game, that is, whether or not it is a period controlled by BB or RB. If the accessory is not working, go to Si17. When the winning combination is in operation, the number of winning medals to be paid out as a result of winning a prize in the current game is added as the payout number of the winning combination operating period (Si12, Si13). Here, the number of winning medals is respectively added to the accessory payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the total accumulated bonus payout number can be added (Si14). If the total accumulated bonus payout number cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Si17. If the total accumulated feature payout number can be added, the number of winning medals is added to the total accumulated feature payout number (Sb15, 16), and the process proceeds to step Si17. Note that whether or not the total accumulated feature payout number can be added is determined with reference to the total accumulated count stop flag.

  The bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is calculated from the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative payout number updated as described above (Si17, Si18). The calculated value is stored as an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number (Si19).

  Subsequently, with reference to the determination game number counter, it is determined whether or not the game is an updated game number (Si20 to Si23). The determination game number counter is a counter that circulates and counts between 1 and 6000 games to determine whether the number of games since the start of counting has reached 2000 games, 4000 games, and 6000 games. This is the counter used. The above determination is made based on whether or not a remainder is generated by dividing the determination counter by 2000. If there is a remainder, the game returns to each state count process assuming that the game is not the number of updated games.

  If there is no remainder when the determination counter is divided by 2000, it is specified from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an updated game of 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games (Si24). Then, a value of the total payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game among the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and stored as a cumulative payout number of 6000 games in the 6000 times calculation buffer, and the read-out total payout counter Is updated to 0 which is an initial value (Si25 to Si27). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter is read out from the accumulated buffer corresponding to the specified update game, and is stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer as the number of accumulated 6000 game bonuses, and the reading-out accessory payout counter is set to the initial value. Update to 0 (Si28 to Si30).

  Further, the bonus payout ratio for the 6000 game cumulative payout number is calculated from the 6000 game cumulative payout number and the 6000 game cumulative payout number stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer. Since the 6000 game cumulative payout number and the 6000 game cumulative payout number are both 3-byte data, the payout ratio is calculated by the calculation method described in the slot machine of the first embodiment (Si31, Si32). . The calculated value is stored as a bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games (Si33). Thereafter, the process returns to each state count process.

  The bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout count and the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like of the game store, 12 are sequentially displayed. At this time, an abbreviation indicating the type of the displayed ratio display is displayed on the credit display 11.

  Referring to FIG. 20, the update statuses of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the 6000 times calculation buffer by the ratio monitoring data processing, the total cumulative calculation buffer storing the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative feature payout number are shown. explain. The stored contents of the accumulated buffers 1 to 3 and 6000 times calculation buffer and the total accumulated calculation buffer are retained at the time of shipment from the factory or unless the data in the RAM 41c is initialized due to some reason.

  Counting in the cumulative buffer 1 and the total cumulative calculation buffer is started from a state in which each buffer value is initialized. When 2000 games have elapsed, counting in the cumulative buffer 2 is started. The accumulated buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have elapsed, counting in the cumulative buffer 3 is started. Cumulative buffer 1 and cumulative buffer 2 continue counting.

  When 2000 games have passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count content of the cumulative buffer 1 is stored in the buffer for calculation 6000 times. Then, the count content of the cumulative buffer 1 is initialized and starts counting from the initial value (0).

  When the next 2000 games elapse, the counting period in the accumulation buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count content of the accumulation buffer 2 is stored in the buffer for calculation 6000 times. Then, the count content of the accumulation buffer 2 is initialized and starts counting from the initial value (0).

  In this way, the counting results between 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times every 2000 games. During this time, the count results of the total cumulative calculation buffer are accumulated without being initialized.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, all the front and back registers are exchanged (Sj1), then the timer interrupt is disabled (Sj2) and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of the reduced voltage state counter is acquired (Sj3). Then, referring to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit 48 (Sj4), it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sj5). When the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Sj6), and the voltage drop state counter is set to the upper limit value. If the value has been reached, a power interruption process (main) described later is performed (Sj7).

  If it is determined in step Sj5 that no voltage drop signal is input, or if it is determined in step Sj6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step Sj8, and the voltage drop state counter is set. Update. When the process proceeds from the step Sj5 to the step Sj8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter. On the other hand, when the process proceeds from the step Sj5 to the step Sj8, the voltage decreases. Update the decrease state counter to add 1.

  Then, the detection state of various switches is input from the input port, and port input processing for generating input data, confirmed data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) is performed (Sj9). Thereafter, by using the second save instruction described above, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area in the game RAM area in a predetermined order. (Sj10), non-game related processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sj11). After that, using the above-described second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sj10 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order to the save and set in the flag register. Thus, the flag register is returned to the state before the non-game related process is performed (Sj12).

  In the non-game related processing, first, using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. Thereafter, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register Are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the non-game related process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when a non-game related process is called from a game program, the state of the register that is saved after the non-game program stack pointer SP is set by the non-game related process is determined by the game program. May be different from the state of the register when calling.

  Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process for detecting an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, a test signal output process for outputting a test signal generated in relation to a game result, and various timers used by the non-game program are updated. A non-game-related timer update process and a role monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the role monitor are sequentially performed. In the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data that can identify the type of the detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is supposed to be set.

  Then, the non-game stack area is stored in the non-game stack area when the non-game related processing is started by using the first return instruction described above, and the value of the register saved in the non-game stack area is reversed. All the registers are restored to the state when the non-game-related processing is started by sequentially reading from and setting the registers corresponding to the order. After that, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game related process is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game related process is started, and the non-game related process is ended. In order to end the non-game related processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer is restored after all the register values saved at the start of the non-game related processing are restored. When the SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register before and after the execution of the LD instruction is changed. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the non-game related process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game related process is started.

  After returning the flag register in step Sj12, the sensor error reference data set by the non-game related process in step Sj11 is referred to (Sj13), and the sensor set by the non-game related process in the current timer interrupt The logical sum of the error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the non-game related process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sj14). Then, a sensor error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and that can identify whether or not an abnormality relating to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected is calculated in step Sj14. Update based on logical sum. If it is determined by performing steps Sj13 to Sj15 that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data, whether or not the sensor error flag indicates that an abnormality has been detected. Regardless of this, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality has been detected. On the other hand, when it is specified that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that an abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag, while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. When it is specified that the error has not been made or the abnormality has been removed, the content of the sensor error reference data is not reflected in the sensor error flag.

  After the sensor error flag is updated in the step of Sj15, a random value update process for updating a random number value in a random number circuit provided in the main control unit 41 is performed (Sj16), and provided in the main control unit 41. The watchdog timer (WDT) register is cleared (Sj17). Thereafter, the value of a branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the process included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and updated by adding a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment), The updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj18). In the process of updating the branching counter, when the branching counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and when the branching counter is 3, the counter is initialized and returned to 0. Update. That is, the value of the branching counter loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referred to in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). For example, a predetermined control is executed when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value. Control will be branched.

  After updating the branching counter in step Sj18, it is determined whether or not the branching counter is 4 (Sj19). If the branching counter is 4, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Timer update processing (Sj20) for updating various predetermined timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED dynamic display processing (Sj21) for controlling the lighting state of the LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, etc.) to perform transmission by setting a lighting signal for dynamically lighting according to the setting by each processing such as the main processing. )I do.

  When it is determined in step Sj19 that the branching counter is not 4, and after the LED dynamic display process is performed in step Sj21, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted out of the external output signal or a medal payout The medal insertion / payout signal transmission process (Sj22) for updating the output setting of the medal payout signal to indicate that is performed and transmitting it to the outside of the slot machine 1, and the security signal (door open signal, setting change signal) of the external output signal , Update the output settings of the input error signal and the payout error signal), and send various commands such as security signal transmission processing (Sj24) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1, door commands and operation end commands set in the command queue. Command transmission processing (Sj25) for performing transmission or the like is sequentially performed.

  Thereafter, referring to the branching counter, it is determined whether or not the branching counter is 2. When the branching counter is 2, when an abnormality relating to the reel occurs (during a reel error) Whether or not a reel error is occurring is determined based on whether or not the reel error flag to be set is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj26). If the reel error is not in progress, a reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel is performed by setting the excitation pattern of each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R according to the progress of the game, etc. (Sj27) .

  If it is determined in step Sj25 that the branching timer is not 2, a reel error is determined in step Sj26, and if the reel control process in step Sj27 is terminated, the setting is performed by the reel control process. Reel motor drive signal output processing for rotating and stopping each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R in a predetermined control mode by outputting a drive signal corresponding to the excited pattern to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R ( Sj29), a port output update process (Sj30) for performing a process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, a process of updating the lighting state of the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, etc. After that, replace all the front and back registers (Sj31), interrupt the timer It is set to yes (Sj32), and terminates the timer interrupt processing (main), it is returned to the main process when the timer interrupt processing (main) is started.

  Next, the control content of the power interruption process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The power interruption process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

  The main control unit 41 executes the power interruption process (main) when it is determined in the above-described timer interrupt process (main) that the voltage drop state has continued for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the power interruption process (main), first, all the front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sk1), and the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are changed to the game stack in the game RAM area. The area is saved by storing in a predetermined order (Sk2), and the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area (Sk3). The predetermined area of the game RAM area including the game stack area of the game RAM area where the main control unit 41 stores the register value and the predetermined area of the game RAM area where the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored is a backup. Even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by the power supply, the stored contents of the game RAM area are stored as long as the power is supplied from the backup power supply.

  First, among the parallel output ports included in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized (Sk4), and the output state is set to the OFF state. Thereby, when the hopper unit 34 is paying out medals, the payout of medals is first preferentially stopped. Thereafter, the output ports 0 and 1 that output the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R among the parallel output ports are initialized (Sk5), and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate, The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  Thereafter, the control signals of the output port 2, the credit indicator 11, and the game auxiliary indicator 12 for outputting the control signals of the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and the flow path switching solenoid 30 among the parallel output ports are displayed. Output ports 4 and 5 to be output, output ports 6 and 7 for outputting test signals, and output ports 8 and 9 for transmitting commands to the sub-control unit 91 are sequentially initialized (Sk6 to Sk11), and various switches Stops output of control signals, etc.

  After the output ports 0 to 9 are initialized in the steps Sk4 to Sk11, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk12) and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The parity adjustment data that has been set is cleared (Sk13). Then, new parity adjustment data of the RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sk14), and the parity adjustment is performed. Data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk15), access to the RAM 41c is prohibited (Sk16), and loop processing starts.

  In the loop processing, the process waits in a state where the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage has been restored, and the program is started from the startup process (main). On the other hand, when the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is input, the operation is stopped internally.

  When the power supply of AC100V is stopped by the above processing, the power interruption process (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game In the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the contents of the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also retained by the supply of backup power. It becomes possible to return to the control state before power interruption. Further, it is possible to specify whether or not the stop operation is effective in the control state before power interruption.

[About non-game related processing]
The control content of the non-game related process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The non-game related process is a subroutine that is included in the non-game program and called by the timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. Further, the non-game related processing sequentially calls sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, medal passage time timer update processing, and display monitor output data selection processing included in the non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the non-game related processing, first, using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is It is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved (Sm1). Thereafter, by using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP is stored in a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is stored in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. The stack pointer SP is set for a non-game program (Sm2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. It is evacuated by storing it (Sm3). Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process (Sm4) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, which is included in the non-game program, is connected to the slot machine 1. Test signal output processing (Sm5) for outputting a test signal to the test apparatus, medal passage time timer update processing (Sm6) for updating a timer for measuring the passage time of medals in the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, A ratio monitor display data selection process (Sm7) for selecting ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

  After performing the role ratio monitor display data selection process in the step Sm7, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area in the step Sm3 using the above-described first return instruction, By sequentially reading from the non-game stack area in the reverse order to the saving and setting to the register corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game related processing is started (Sm8). Thereafter, by using the above-described LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sm1 is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game-related process (Sm9), the non-game-related process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller timer interrupt process (main).

  As described above, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passage time timer update process, and role monitor display data selection process) according to the non-game related process included in the non-game program. In this case, by calling the non-game related process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sj11) included in the game program, various processes of the non-game related process are performed, and when each process ends, the caller Return to the timer interrupt processing (main).

  Further, in the non-game related process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) which is a game program, the stack pointer SP and the register are first saved, and then the sensor monitoring process, the test signal output process, A plurality of processes such as a medal passage time timer update process and a role ratio monitor display data selection process are performed. After all these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and the registers saved when called from the game program are restored, and the process returns to the caller timer interrupt process (main). In such a configuration, that is, in a non-game program called from a game program by a single call process, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passage time timer update process, role monitor display data selection) In the configuration in which the processing is performed), for each of a plurality of processes performed in the non-game program, the process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register and the process of restoring them are not performed, and the process can be performed once. .

  In addition, when a non-game program (for example, non-game related process) is called from a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the calculation result is stored in the register of the main control unit 41 on the game program side. The flag register value is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area and then saved, and then the non-game program is called and saved after the non-game program is terminated and before the non-game program is called. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register from the game stack area and setting it in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before calling the non-game program. As a result, when the non-game program calls the non-game program, the game program uses the flag register to perform an operation, and even when the value of the flag register is changed, the game program returns to the game program. In addition, the value of the flag register can be restored to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

  Also, in a non-game program (for example, non-game related processing), when called by a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is used. The value of the current address of the indicated game stack area is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when the non-game program is terminated, the value of the stack pointer SP saved to the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game program is started Is set as the stack pointer SP, so that the stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the non-game program is started. Thereby, even when the stack pointer SP is changed in the non-game program and the stack pointer SP is changed, the non-game program is started when the non-game program is started. In the state where the stack pointer SP is returned to the state, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

  Further, in a non-game program (for example, non-game related processing), when called by a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game RAM. Saved by storing in the non-game stack area of the area. Then, after performing the predetermined processing according to the non-game program, when ending the non-game program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game program is started Are sequentially read from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding registers, so that all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game program is started. Thereby, even if the non-game program uses a register to perform various processes in the non-game program and changes the value of the register, when the non-game program is terminated, the non-game program It is possible to return to the calling game program in a state where all the register values are returned to the state when the game is started.

  Further, in the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program is saved. When quitting, all registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started by setting the values of the registers stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding registers. It has become. The register values used by the game program are stored and saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the registers are restored from the non-game stack area, so that all register values are stored in the game stack area. It is not necessary to provide an area for saving, and it is only necessary to provide an area for saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area, so that the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 requires a 1-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the value of the flag register, while the main control unit 41 requires a 2-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the values of all the registers. To do. When the non-game program is called from the game program, the value of the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area on the game program side, and then the non-game program is On the non-gaming program side, all register values are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the game program program is more than when all the registers are saved on the game program side. The capacity can be reduced.

[About sensor monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor is updated with reference to the timer interruption process (main) branch counter that is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is time (Sn1) to perform processing related to the payout sensor for monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection states 34c and 34d. And when it is the timing which performs the process regarding a payout sensor, it progresses to the step of Sn2. On the other hand, when the process related to the payout sensor is not at the timing, the process proceeds to step Sn16, and the process related to the insertion sensor for monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed.

  If it is determined in the step of Sn1 that it is time to perform a process related to the payout sensor, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c in order to transmit the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring process to the game program The reference data is cleared (Sn2). Then, the error code is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and an error flag that can specify whether or not an error of the error codes E1 to E5 has occurred (Sn3), and the error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether or not an abnormality in E4 has occurred (Sn4).

  If it is determined in step Sn4 that an error has occurred in error codes E2, E3, and E4, the process proceeds to step Sn16, while if it is determined that no error in error codes E2, E3, and E4 has occurred. After referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is stored (Sn5), paying out medals by the hopper unit 34 with reference to a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c It is determined whether or not a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sn6).

  If it is determined in the Sn6 step that the payout flag is set, whether one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state based on the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in the Sn5 step. (Sn7), if one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON, the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is stored is referred to (Sn8). It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sn9).

  When it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON in the Sn7 step and the edge data is set in the Sn7 step, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 is paid out. When it begins to pass the detection range of the sensors 34c, 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 has finished passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c The sensor check timer 1 set in the predetermined area is initialized and set to 0 (Sn10), and the counting of the passage time of a new medal is started. When it is determined that the edge data is not set in the step of Sn9, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in the step of Sn10, 1 is added to the sensor check timer 1 and updated (Sn11).

  The sensor check timer 1 is the time from when a medal starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to when it finishes passing, and from when the medal finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. This is a timer for measuring the time until the next medal starts to pass. By being updated by the step of Sn11 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 relates to the payout sensor during the period during which the payout flag is set, that is, during the period during which the hopper unit 34 performs the medal payout control. The timing is updated every four timings (timer interrupt processing (main) every four times, 2.24 milliseconds).

  When it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state in the step Sn7 and no edge data is set in the step Sn9, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 34 by the medal payout control. Is in the period between the detection of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or the period between the payout of one medal and the payout of the next medal during payout control. Timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (in this embodiment, 2.24 milliseconds) (Sn11).

  Then, after updating the sensor check timer 1 in the step of Sn11, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds a predetermined maximum monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Determine (Sn12).

  Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required from the time when the medal is paid out by the hopper unit 34 until the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, and After the medal paid out by the hopper unit 34 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medal is paid out by the hopper unit 34 and passes through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is set to a time longer than the longer of the time required to start. As a result, during the period during which the payout control for paying out medals is performed, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can be continued in the ON state and the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time during which the detection state can be continued in the OFF state has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step Sn12 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data (payout sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. ) Is set to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sn13), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sn14), and a new medal passing time is started to be measured. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15), and the process proceeds to Sn17. On the other hand, when it is determined in step j12 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15). Go to step.

  Further, when it is determined that the paying flag is set in the step of Sn6, and when it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state in the step of Sn7, the processing of the steps of Sn8 to Sn13 is performed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to the Sn14 step to maintain the sensor error reference data in the cleared state in the Sn2 step, proceeds to the Sn14 step, initializes and sets the sensor check timer 1 to 0, The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the Sn14 step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn15), and the process proceeds to the Sn17 step.

  If it is determined in the step Sn6 that the payout flag is not set, both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in the step Sn5. (Sn16), if both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sn7. Then, when it is determined in the step of Sn7 that one of the payout sensors 34c, 34d is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to the step of Sn17 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the Sn6 step that the payout flag is not set, and if it is determined in the Sn16 step that both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not OFF, the process proceeds to the Sn13 step. After the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sn14), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sn15), the process proceeds to Sn17.

  By performing the processing of the above steps Sn1 to Sn16, processing related to the payout sensor for determining whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is performed. After the process is performed, the process after the step of Sn17 is performed, so that the process related to the input sensor is performed following the process related to the payout sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the process related to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring process, first, whether or not a medal care permission flag indicating permission of insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sn17), and if the medal care permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's non-game related process.

  If it is determined in the step of Sn17 that the medal care permission flag is set, a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sn18), and an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter, medal) Whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring is determined based on whether or not a sensor error flag that can specify whether or not a sensor error has been detected is set (Sn19). If the medal sensor error is in progress, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's non-game related process.

  If it is determined that the medal sensor error is not in the step of Sn19, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area (in FIG. 26, the inserted medal sensors 1, 2, 3) With reference to the data (Sn20), it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sn21).

  When it is determined in the step of Sn21 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is retreated to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sn22), With reference to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sn23).

  The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when it finishes passing. The sensor check timer 1 is updated by the step of Sn27 in the sensor monitoring process, so that the sensor check timer 1 is at a timing (timer interrupt process (main) every time the sensor monitoring process is performed in the period when the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. It is updated every 0.56 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sn23 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (injected medal sensors 2 and 3 in FIG. 26) referred to in the Sn20 step are ON. If the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state, the medal insertion without referring to the medal insertion signal is performed based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the medal insertion signal processing. It is determined whether or not it is within the signal ignoring time (in this embodiment, within 504 milliseconds from the start of the medal channel switching control by the channel switching solenoid 30) (Sn25), and the medal insertion signal is ignored. If it is not within the time, one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) is added to the sensor check timer 2. Updated (Sn26), the value of the sensor check timer 2 after addition is the maximum value of the normal passing time range required for the medal to normally pass the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31a (99.68 m in this embodiment). ) Is exceeded (Sn27). Note that the normal passing time range is a measured value of the time required for a medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the inserting in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in this embodiment, the range is from 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

  If it is determined in step Sn27 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, if it is determined in step Sn24 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state, the inserted medal After sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sn28), the sensor check timer 2 is set. It is initialized and set to 0 (Sn 29), and the counting of the passage time of a new medal is started. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's non-game related process.

  If it is determined in the step Sn21 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, if it is determined in the step Sn26 that it is not within the medal insertion signal ignoring time based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer, the sensor in the step Sn27. If it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sn30), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. Return to the non-game related process of the caller.

  As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, the processes of the steps Sn1 to Sn16 are performed, whereby the process related to the payout sensor is performed, and an abnormality related to the payout of medals occurs based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. Whether or not an abnormality related to the insertion of medals has occurred is determined based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is like that.

  Further, in the sensor monitoring process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality related to the medal payout has occurred by performing a process related to the payout sensor, and then the process related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed regardless of the result of the determination. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality related to the input.

[Test signal output processing]
The test signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the sensor monitoring process described above, the main control unit 41 continues to perform a test signal process.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the test signal output process, first, the one game time management timer set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the main process is referred to (Sp1), and the one game time management timer is set. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value when starting the time counting by one game time management timer and corresponding to 4.1 seconds) (Sp2). If the step Sb20 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main), which is the caller of the non-game related process that called the test number output process, is performed, one game time management is performed. The timer value is set to a predetermined value.

  When it is determined in the step Sp2 that the one game time management timer is the initial value, the branch interrupt counter (main) refers to a branch counter set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sp3), When the branching counter is a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), a predetermined value (output to be output to the test apparatus) set in advance in a test signal output timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this example, the time for continuing the output of the test signal that can specify one output data ((22.4 milliseconds) × number of output data (4))) is set. To start timing (Sp4). On the other hand, if it is determined that the one game time management timer is not the initial value in the step of Sp2, if it is determined that the branch timer is not 3 in the step of Sp3, after setting the test signal output timer in the step of Sp4, An initial address of an output data address for specifying a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which output data to be output as a test signal is stored is acquired (Sp5). The output data is data that can identify the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role in the internal lottery. The output data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning information output process performed in step Sb9 of the main process described above.

  Thereafter, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sp6), and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has ended (Sp7). If the test signal output timer is not 0 and the time measurement for the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has not ended, it is determined whether or not the output data fixing mode is set (Sp8). The output data fixing mode is set when the output data set by the RT information output process performed in step Sb2 of the main process is output as a test signal.

  If the output data fixing mode is not set, the test signal output timer is updated by subtracting one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sp9), and then in the Sp6 step. When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for which the output of one test data can be specified is continued) It is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sp10). If the remainder value is 0, the process returns to the step Sp5, and the processing of the steps Sp5 to Sp10 is performed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in the step Sp9. On the other hand, if the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sp6 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time for continuing the output of the test signal that can specify one output data (22. The quotient when dividing by the value (corresponding to 4 milliseconds) is calculated, the value of the quotient is added to the output data address of the initial address acquired in the step Sp5 (Sp11), and the process proceeds to the step Sp12. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sp13).

  If it is determined in step Sp8 that the output data fixing mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sp12, and the output data address of the initial address set in step Sp6 is advanced by one address (Sp12). Output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sp13).

  Thereafter, the output data acquired in the step of Sp13 is set as the test signal output (Sp14), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sp15). In the step of Sp7, if it is determined that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sp6 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sp16), and the test signal output is output to the output port 6. Set and output (Sp15). After setting the output of the test signal in the step of Sp15, the test signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the non-game related process of the caller.

  By such control, the main control unit 41 is started when one game time management timer is set to an initial value, that is, when rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started as a game. A test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds × 4)).

  Further, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs four output data that can specify the winning status of the general combination and special combination in the internal lottery as a test signal every predetermined time (22.4 milliseconds in this embodiment). The output is switched and output from the output port 6.

  Next, the medal passage time timer update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the test signal output process described above, the main control unit 41 continues to perform the medal passage time timer update process.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the medal passage time timer update process, first, the medal passage time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to by the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, It is determined whether or not the value of the medal passage time timer is 0 (Sq1).

  When the value of the medal passage time timer is 0, that is, when the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not counted by the medal sensor process, the medal passage time timer update process is terminated. Return to the non-game related processing of the caller.

  On the other hand, when the value of the medal passage time timer is not 0, that is, when the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is counted by medal sensor processing, a predetermined value is added to the medal passage time timer. After the update (Sq2), the medal passage time timer update process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's non-game related process.

[Display monitor output data selection processing]
The display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 41 performs the display monitor output data selection process after the medal passage time timer update process described above.

  The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed every 0.56 milliseconds by the main control unit 41, and is used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). It is the process which sets the lighting data of LED to be performed. The display monitor output data selection process includes a display monitor output data selection process (1) (see FIG. 28) and a display monitor output data selection process (2) (see FIG. 29). Processes (1) and (2) may be collectively referred to as display monitor output data selection process), and display monitor output data selection process (2) is called and executed in display monitor output data selection process (1). It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 28, when the display monitor output data selection process (1) is started, the lighting data such as the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the 1BETLED 14 stored in the game RAM area are not displayed. Copy to the lighting data storage area of the game RAM area (Sr1 to Sr4).

  Subsequently, whether or not a medal can be inserted is determined by the state of the game medal blocker. The game medal blocker is off when the setting change or setting check is being performed during a game or error, and medals cannot be inserted. If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in Sr8, which will be described later, and OFF data is set in the display monitor flag. If a medal can be inserted, the process proceeds to step Sr6.

  In step Sr6, it is determined whether the front door 1b is in an open state with reference to the state of the door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b. If the front door 1b is not in the open state, the operation proceeds to step Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in step Sr8 described later, and the off data is set in the display monitor flag. When the front door 1b is in an open state, the process proceeds to step Sr7.

  In step Sr7, it is determined whether the bet amount is set with reference to the value of the inserted medals stored in the game RAM area. When the bet number is set, the process proceeds to step Sr13 without determining the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 in step Sr8, which will be described later, and off data is set in the display monitor flag. If the bet amount is not set, the process proceeds to step Sr8.

  In step Sr8, it is determined whether the reset / setting switch 38 is operated. When the reset / setting switch 38 is not operated, the process proceeds to step Sr15, and the content of the display monitor flag described later is determined. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the process proceeds to step Sr9, and the setting for displaying the ratio on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is performed.

  As a setting for performing a ratio display on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, a display monitor selection timer and a display monitor display content vector are initialized (Sr9 to Sr11). Subsequently, ON data is set in the display monitor flag (Sr12, Sr14), and the process proceeds to step Sr15 to determine the contents of the display monitor flag. The display monitor selection timer is a timer for measuring a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) for displaying one ratio display, and a value corresponding to the predetermined period ( In this embodiment, after 8927) is set as an initial value, every time a timer interrupt process (main) is performed, one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) is subtracted, and the display monitor is selected. When the timer value becomes 0, the elapse of a predetermined period is counted. The display monitor display content vector is data for specifying the type of ratio display displayed by switching in a predetermined order.

  Specifically, as data set in the display monitor display content vector, “0” corresponds to the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, “1” corresponds to the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, “ “2” corresponds to the payout ratio between the past 6000 games, “3” corresponds to the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and “4” corresponds to the payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Yes. However, in this embodiment, when the ratio display is displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the total cumulative payout number Calculation and display of the combined payout ratio is not performed.

  In steps Sr15 and Sr16, the value of the display monitor flag is acquired, and it is determined whether on-data or off-data is set. The display monitor flag is set to ON data when ratio display is performed, and is set to OFF data when ratio display is not performed.

  If it is determined in step Sr16 that the off-data is set in the display monitor flag, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) without executing the subsequent steps. In the LED dynamic display process of Sd15 in the timer interrupt process (main), the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are referred to with reference to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the non-game RAM area. , 1BETLED 14 and the like are turned on. When returning to the timer interrupt process (main) without executing the steps after Sr16, the lighting data storage area in the non-game RAM area is stored in the game RAM copied in the steps Sr1 to Sr4. Lighting data, that is, lighting data for performing other display (display of the number of credits by the credit display 11, display of the number of payouts by the game auxiliary display 12, etc.) displayed when the ratio display is not performed is stored. . Therefore, other displays are performed on the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the 1BETLED 14, and the like.

  With reference to FIG. 29, the display monitor output data selection process (2) executed when it is determined in step Sr16 that on-data is set in the display monitor flag will be described.

  In the display monitor output data selection process (2), first, the display monitor selection timer is updated to determine whether the comparison value has been reached (Ss1 to Ss4). If the display monitor selection timer has not reached the comparison value, the process proceeds to step Ss7. When the display monitor selection timer has reached the comparison value, the display monitor selection timer is cleared to 0, and the display monitor display content vector is updated to switch the type of ratio display (Ss5, Ss6). Proceed to step.

  In the step from Ss7, the data stored in the 7SEG display monitor output table is read from the value of the display monitor display content vector, and the abbreviation (for example, display order 1 in the display order 1) is displayed on the credit display 11. When the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is displayed, data for displaying “1A”) is acquired (Ss7 to Ss10).

  Subsequently, with reference to the display monitor digest game determination flag, it is determined whether the total number of accumulated games exceeds 5999 games (Ss11, Ss12).

  When the total cumulative number of games does not exceed 5999 games, a display monitor selection timer is acquired to flash the abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content, and the timer value is divided by a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds. It is determined whether it is a lighting period or an extinguishing period (Ss13 to Ss15). When it is determined that the period is extinguished (when the calculation result is an odd number), clear data is acquired as data for displaying an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content, and the lighting data storage area corresponding to the credit indicator 11 is acquired. (Ss16, Ss17), and the credit indicator 11 is turned off. In addition, when it is determined that the lighting period is determined (when the calculation result is an even number), the data for displaying the abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content acquired previously is stored in the lighting data corresponding to the credit indicator 11. The abbreviation that is stored in the area (Ss17) and indicates the display content currently being displayed is displayed on the credit indicator 11. Thereby, when the total cumulative number of games does not exceed 5999 games, the abbreviation indicating the display content currently displayed on the credit display 11 is repeatedly turned on and off at intervals of 0.3 seconds.

  When the total cumulative number of games exceeds 5999 games, data for displaying the abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content that is uniformly acquired first is stored in the lighting data storage area corresponding to the credit indicator 11. (Ss17), an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed content is displayed on the credit indicator 11. Thus, when the total cumulative number of games exceeds 5999 games, an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is displayed on the credit display 11 without blinking.

  Next, data for displaying “-” is acquired once as data for displaying the ratio to be displayed corresponding to the abbreviation (Ss18). Then, it is determined which ratio is to be displayed with reference to the display monitor display content vector (Ss20, Ss21).

  Here, the display monitor display content vector stores a value corresponding to the advantageous section ratio with respect to the cumulative number of games, a value corresponding to the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a value corresponding to the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. If this is the case, the data that is the basis for these ratios and ratios is not aggregated. Therefore, the process proceeds to step Ss38, where data for displaying “-” is stored in the lighting data storage area as display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). As described above, in the LED dynamic display process of Sd15 in the timer interrupt process (main), the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary display are referred to by referring to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the non-game RAM area. The device 12 and the 1BETLED 14 are turned on. Therefore, the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 each have an abbreviation and an abbreviation indicating an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. “-” Will be displayed.

  Subsequently, 70% which is the specified ratio (threshold value) of the accessory ratio is set (Ss22). The ratio display is performed in a different display mode when the display value exceeds the specified ratio. When the display value exceeds the specified ratio, the display value is blinked.

  Then, the address of the area in which the payout ratio between the past 6000 games is stored is set as an initial value, and calculation is performed on the initial value using the value of the display monitor display content vector. The bonus payout ratio corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is acquired from the bonus payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout number (Ss23 to Ss25).

  Then, the acquired payout ratio is compared with the set specified ratio, and when the acquired payout ratio is a value equal to or greater than the threshold value, a setting for blinking is made (Ss26 to Ss29). ).

  Further, the data to be displayed in each of the tenth place and the first place of the game auxiliary display 12 is specified based on the acquired bonus payout ratio (Ss30 to Ss32). Further, it is determined whether the setting for performing blinking display is made (Ss33). When the setting for performing the blinking display is not made, the specified data is stored in the lighting data storage area as the display content on the game auxiliary display 12, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). As described above, in the LED dynamic display process of Sd15 in the timer interrupt process (main), the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary display are referred to by referring to the lighting data stored in the lighting data storage area of the non-game RAM area. The device 12 and the 1BETLED 14 are turned on. Therefore, the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 indicate an abbreviation indicating the payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the payout ratio between the past 6000 games, or the payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout number. The abbreviation and the payout ratio for the total amount of payouts are displayed.

  When the setting for performing blinking display is made, a display monitor selection timer is acquired for blinking the bonus payout ratio, as in the case where the total cumulative number of games does not exceed 5999 games. The value is divided by a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds to determine whether it is a lighting period or an extinguishing period (Ss34 to Ss36). If it is the lighting period, data for displaying the accessory ratio as the display contents on the game auxiliary display 12 is stored in the lighting data storage area, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main). When it is the extinguishing period, clear data is acquired as data for displaying the accessory ratio. Then, the clear data is stored in the lighting data storage area as the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 (Ss37, Ss38), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main).

  As a result, when the bonus payout ratio is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 indicate the abbreviation indicating the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the role between the past 6000 games. An abbreviation indicating the item payout ratio, or an abbreviation indicating the item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number and an item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and a numerical value indicating the item payout ratio displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed. The light is turned on and off repeatedly at intervals of 0.3 seconds.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when performing a blink control (on-off control) in which an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display displayed on the credit indicator 11 is repeatedly turned on and off at intervals of 0.3 seconds. Is a display monitor selection timer value (8927 to 0 in this embodiment) for measuring a period (for example, 5 seconds) for displaying one ratio display, and a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds (in this embodiment). 536) when the quotient obtained by division is an even number, that is, when the value of the least significant bit is 0 in binary notation, the clear data is set as the output data of the credit indicator 11 to obtain the credit. The display 11 is controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, when the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the display monitor selection timer by the value corresponding to 0.3 seconds is an odd number, that is, when the value of the least significant bit is 1 in binary notation, the credit indicator By setting data for displaying an abbreviation of the accessory ratio as the output data of 11, the credit indicator 11 is controlled to be in a lighting state.

  In addition, when performing flashing control for repeatedly turning on and off the numerical value indicating the bonus payout ratio on the game auxiliary display 12 at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the display monitor selection timer Is divided by a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds (536 in this embodiment) and the resulting quotient is an even number, the output of the game auxiliary display 12 By setting clear data as data, the credit indicator 11 is controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, when the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the display monitor selection timer by the value corresponding to 0.3 seconds is an odd number, an abbreviation of the accessory ratio is displayed as output data of the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the data, the credit indicator 11 is controlled to be lit.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the result of calculation using the specific value (536 corresponding to 0.3 seconds) for the value of the display monitor selection timer (for example, the display monitor selection timer). Control for setting the output data of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 based on the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the value by a specific value), every time display monitor data selection processing is performed, that is, timer interrupt processing (main) By repeatedly performing it every time it is performed, the display on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to blink.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 performs control for setting the output data of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 based on the calculation result using the specific value for the value of the display monitor selection timer. The display of the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 is controlled to be blinked by repeating each time the data selection process is performed. In the blink control, the initial value of the display monitor selection timer is controlled. Thus, the control based on the result of the calculation using the specific value, that is, the first control of the blinking control is set to OFF control.

  In the blinking control, the control that is performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the final value (0) of the display monitor selection timer, that is, the last control of the blinking control is set to OFF control. Yes.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the lighting identification segment that can identify the range in which the total number of accumulated games has been reached by the role ratio monitor data processing in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, an abbreviation of an accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games and an abbreviation of an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games are displayed on the credit indicator 11, and a numerical value indicating an accessory payout ratio corresponding to the abbreviation is displayed on the game auxiliary indicator 12. When the total number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games based on the lighting identification segment stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag, the abbreviation of the item payout ratio on the credit indicator 11 is displayed. Flashing control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the display, and when the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 6000 games or more, the display of the abbreviation of the item payout ratio on the credit indicator 11 is turned on without flashing. To control. By controlling blinking of the abbreviation display on the credit indicator 11, it is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and there is a possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased Can be recognized. Here, the range of the total number of games (in this embodiment, 0 to 5999 games) in which the main control unit 41 performs blinking control of the abbreviation display of the accessory payout ratio is determined according to the design value of the slot machine 1. At least in the slot machine 1, the bonus payout ratio is approximately in the range up to the number of games necessary to converge to the design value.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calculates, as the ratio display, the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout count, and the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 can be displayed on the other hand, but as a ratio display, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout are not calculated. Although it is a structure which is not displayed on the display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, as a ratio display, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, etc. The ratio display may be calculated and displayed. For example, in the configuration in which the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is displayed as the ratio display, until the cumulative number of games reaches the specified number of games (for example, 175000 games) where the advantageous section ratio converges to the design value of the slot machine. The display of the advantageous section ratio on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to blink, and after the cumulative number of games reaches the specified number of games, the advantageous section ratio display is turned on without blinking. It is preferable to control. In addition, for example, in a configuration in which the combined display ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts and the combined combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games are displayed as a ratio display, the specified number of games that the combined combination payout ratio almost converges to the slot machine design value ( For example, until the cumulative number of games reaches 17500 games), the display of the combined payout ratio on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to flash, and after the cumulative number of games reaches the specified number of games, It is preferable to control so that the combination payout ratio display is turned on without blinking.

[About the effects]
As a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a thing of composition. In such a configuration, when a non-game program is called from a game program every time a process included in the non-game program is executed in the game program, the game program and the non-game program are repeatedly transferred. This causes a problem that the processing becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which a program is stored, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. And a storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored And a plurality of types of abnormality determination (in relation to determination of abnormality relating to medal payout and medal insertion) by one call from timer interrupt processing that is a game program to non-game related processing that is a non-game program (Determination of abnormality). In such a configuration, a non-game of the ROM 41b, which is a game program area of the ROM 41b in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program and which stores a non-game program not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which the program area is separately assigned, a plurality of types of abnormality determination are performed in the non-game program by calling the non-game program once from the game program. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, in the non-game related process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, there are two types of abnormalities: determination of abnormality relating to medal payout and determination of abnormality relating to medal insertion. However, in a non-game program called by a single call from the game program, it may be configured to determine three or more types of abnormalities.

  In this embodiment, the non-game program is called from the game program. From the timer interrupt process included in the non-game program, the non-game related process for determining a plurality of types of abnormality is included in the non-game program. Although it is a structure to call, as a game program for calling a non-game program that determines a plurality of types of abnormalities, a process included in a game program other than the timer interrupt process may be applied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the non-game related process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, a sensor monitoring process, which is one subroutine, is performed to determine abnormality relating to the medal payout. And a configuration for determining an abnormality relating to the insertion of a medal, that is, a configuration for determining a plurality of types of abnormality by one subroutine, but a non-game program called by a game program is configured by a plurality of subroutines, one type for each subroutine In the non-game related process, for example, a first subroutine for determining an abnormality related to the medal payout and a second subroutine for determining an abnormality regarding the insertion of medals are performed. It may be configured to determine the abnormality. In such a configuration, the management of the program is facilitated by setting a plurality of types of abnormality determination processing as a subroutine for each type of abnormality determination.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41, and when calling a non-game related process that is a non-game program from a timer interrupt process that is a game program, the register and stack pointer SP used in the game program are saved and When returning from the game program to the game program, the saved register and stack pointer SP are restored. In such a configuration, when calling a non-game program from a game program, it is possible to prevent the data of the register and stack pointer SP used in the game program from being damaged.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41 and a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data. The RAM 41c is used by a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored so as to be readable and writable, and by a non-game program. A non-game RAM area in which non-game data is stored in a readable manner, and the non-game-related process included in the non-game program is called once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program. In the case of multiple types of abnormality judgment, When a determination is made regarding an abnormality to be performed and an abnormality relating to the insertion of a medal is performed, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the result of the abnormality determination is stored in the non-game RAM area, and the timer interrupt process is returned from the non-game related process. In addition, the timer interrupt process that is the game program is configured to refer to the sensor error reference data stored in the non-game RAM storage area without performing other processes. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before performing other processing, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In addition, after returning from the non-game program that performs abnormality determination to the game program, the sensor error reference data is referenced before other processing is performed, so other information based on the error flag that reflects the latest sensor error reference data is used. Can be performed.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. A non-game-related process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program once, and as a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the non-game-related process, In the non-game-related processing, even if an abnormality is determined by determining an abnormality related to the medal payout, the non-game-related processing is performed after determining the abnormality related to the medal payout. In this configuration, the determination of abnormality relating to the insertion of medals is continued. In such a configuration, in a non-game related process that is a non-game program called from a timer interrupt process that is a game program, regardless of whether or not an abnormality is determined by determining an abnormality related to medal payout It is also possible to determine an abnormality relating to the insertion of medals, which is an abnormality of this type.

  In this embodiment, in the non-game related process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, there are two types of abnormalities: determination of abnormality relating to medal payout and determination of abnormality relating to medal insertion. However, in a non-game program called by a single call from a game program, it may be configured to determine two or more types of abnormalities. In such a configuration, a non-game program Whether one type of abnormality is determined or not, even if one type of abnormality is determined, the other type of abnormality determination is continuously performed. Regardless, abnormality determination can be performed for other types of abnormality.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by calling the non-game related process included in the non-game program once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, the game medium as a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the non-game related process. It is the structure which performs the determination of the abnormality regarding the payout of a medal and the abnormality determination regarding the insertion of the medal. In such a configuration, the abnormality determination relating to the payout of medals as game media and the abnormality determination relating to the insertion of medals can be performed by calling the non-game program once.

  The slot machine 1 which is a gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area for storing a program and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The area includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, In the non-game program by calling one non-game program (non-game related process) from the game program (timer interrupt process), the abnormality determination (determination of abnormality relating to the medal payout in the sensor monitoring process, abnormality of the medal insertion) Judgment), to an external device connected to the slot machine 1 Among the external output signals that are input, output control (test signal output processing) of the test signal output to the test device, and a role that is based on the history of the game, a predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary display) This is a configuration for performing a plurality of controls including display control (ratio monitor display data selection processing) to be displayed in 12). In such a configuration, a non-game of the ROM 41b, which is a game program area of the ROM 41b in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program and which stores a non-game program not related to the progress of the game. In the configuration in which the program area and the game area are allocated separately, the non-game program is called by a single non-game program call, and the non-game program determines the abnormality, the test signal output control, and the role based on the game history. Since a plurality of controls including display control to be displayed on the predetermined display are performed, it is possible to reduce the traffic between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs abnormality determination (as a plurality of controls in the non-game program by calling one non-game program (non-game related process) from the game program (timer interrupt process). In the sensor monitoring process, the abnormality relating to the medal payout, the abnormality relating to the medal insertion), the output control of the test signal output to the test apparatus (test signal output process), and the role ratio based on the game history The display control (ratio monitor display data selection processing) to be displayed on the predetermined display and the control to update the timer (medal passage time timer update processing) are performed, but at least two types are called by one non-game program call. The above-described control may be performed. For example, when a non-game program is called from a game program, abnormality determination and test are performed. A configuration for performing signal output control, a configuration for performing display control for displaying abnormality determination and a duty ratio on a predetermined display, a configuration for performing display control for displaying output control and role ratio of a test signal on a predetermined display, an abnormality determination, and A configuration for performing control to update the timer may be used. Even with these configurations, it is possible to reduce the traffic between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines an abnormality in the non-game program and outputs it to the test device by calling the non-game program (non-game related process) once from the game program (timer interrupt process). It is configured to perform a plurality of controls including test signal output control and display control for displaying a role ratio based on a game history on a predetermined display. In the abnormality determination, two types of abnormality determination (medal payout) However, it may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, or may be configured to perform a plurality of three or more types of abnormality determination. . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the traffic between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41, and an abnormality determination in the non-game related process (determination of an abnormality related to the payout of medals) by a single call from a timer interrupt process included in the game program to a non-game related process included in the non-game program. In this non-game-related process, the sensor monitoring process, which is a process for determining the abnormality relating to the insertion of medals), and the test signal output process, which is the process for controlling the output of the test signal output to the test apparatus, are performed. The sensor monitoring process and test signal output process are called as subroutines. It is configured to be. In such a configuration, since the process for performing the abnormality determination and the process for performing the output control of the external output signal output to the external device are set as subroutines, the management of the program becomes easy.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines an abnormality in the non-game program (for example, determination of an abnormality relating to a payout of medals, a medal, etc.) by one call from a timer interrupt process that is a game program to a non-game related process that is a non-game program. Sensor monitoring process that is a process for determining the abnormality related to the input of the test) and test signal output process that is a process for controlling the output of the test signal. In the test signal output process in the non-game program, the process of the game program In this configuration, the output state of the test signal is set by using an output port (in this embodiment, output port 6) that is not set to ON data or OFF data, that is, an output port that is not used in the processing of the game program. . In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal whose output state is controlled by the processing of the game program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state by the test signal output processing in the non-game program.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Part 41, an abnormality determination (determination of an abnormality related to medal payout) in a non-game related process by a single call from a timer interrupt process included in the game program to a non-game related process included in the non-game program Display control for displaying on the predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12) the sensor monitoring process, which is a process for performing an abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals, and the role based on the game history. Display monitor data selection processing to be performed, in the non-game related processing A configuration in which sensor monitoring process and the display monitor data selection processing is called as a subroutine respectively. In such a configuration, the process of performing the abnormality determination and the process of performing the display control of the role ratio are set as subroutines, respectively, so that the management of the program becomes easy.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can display either a number indicating a credit or a number and a symbol indicating a type of a role on the credit display 11, and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to display a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out, a number indicating a navigation number by navigation notification, an error code, or a number indicating a ratio of ratios, and the game program indicates the state of the game Display control is performed to display credit, payout number, navigation number, error code as display using display data stored in the game program area, and the non-game program serves as a display indicating the state based on the game history. It is a configuration that performs display control to display the type and ratio of the ratio using display data stored in the non-game program area. Display data used in display control for displaying a state based on a game history in a non-game program and display data used in display control for displaying a game state in a game program (for example, the number “0”) To “9”), the display data is stored in the game program area and the non-game program area, respectively. In such a configuration, in the display control of the role ratio for displaying the state based on the game history in the non-game program, the display data stored in the non-game program area is used, the credit for displaying the game state in the game program, etc. In the display control, the display data stored in the game program area can be used to reduce the number of game programs and non-game programs as much as possible.

  The slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. Unit 41 and an external device connected to the slot machine 1 in the non-game related process by one call of the non-game related process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program Of the external output signals that are output, a test signal output process that is a process for controlling the output of the test signal that is output to the test apparatus and a role that is based on the game history are displayed on a predetermined display (credit display 11, game A display monitor data selection process for controlling display to be displayed on the auxiliary display 12). Ri, in the non-game-related processing, the test signal output processing and display monitor for data selection processing is configured to be called as a subroutine respectively. In such a configuration, the process of controlling the output of the test signal and the process of performing the display control of the ratio are set as subroutines, respectively, so that the management of the program becomes easy.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a configuration one. In such a configuration, the storage area for game data used in the game program and the storage area for non-game data used in the non-game program are also allocated to separate areas. Refer to the non-game data in the game program. If the game program refers to the data in the non-game data area every time the process is executed, it is necessary to access both the game data area and the non-game data area many times from the game program. Problem arises.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and data RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing the game area, the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, A non-game program area in which non-game programs not related to progress are stored. The storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored so as to be readable and writable. Non-game RAM in which non-game data to be used is readable and stored In the sensor monitoring process of the non-game related process that is a non-game program, the abnormality determination regarding the medal payout and the abnormality determination regarding the insertion of the medal are performed as the abnormality determination. Based on the timer interrupt process (main), which is a game program that updates the sensor error reference data as the first abnormality data stored in the non-game RAM area and calls the non-game related process, the game program is changed from the non-game related process to the game program. When returning to, the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area is referred to, and the sensor error flag is updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data In the main process that is possible and the game program to be performed thereafter, it is stored in the game RAM area. With reference to the second abnormal data, it is configured to determine whether or not to shift to an error state to disable the progress of the game.

  In such a configuration, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Are separately allocated, and a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program are stored in a readable manner are separately provided. In the configuration assigned to the game program, when returning from the non-game program to the game program, the game program refers to the first abnormal data stored in the non-game data area and plays a game based on the first abnormal data. Update the second abnormal data stored in the data area, and further Gram refers to the second abnormal data stored in the game data area to determine whether or not to shift to an error state that disables the progress of the game, so once the first abnormality in the non-game data area By referring to the data and updating the second abnormal data in the game data area, in the game program such as the main process to be performed thereafter, the first in the non-game data area is repeatedly performed every time the process related to the abnormality determination is performed. Since it is possible to refer to the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program without accessing the abnormal data, the frequency of referring to the non-game data area from the game program can be reduced as much as possible.

  When the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment returns from the non-game related process that is a non-game program to the timer interrupt process that is a game program, the medal-related error reference is made as the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area. With reference to the data, the sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormality data, and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, With reference to the first abnormality data stored in the non-game RAM area, the logical sum of the first abnormality data and the sensor error flag stored in the game RAM area is calculated, and the sensor is determined according to the calculation result. When the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormality data by updating the error flag, the second abnormality data is updated, and the first abnormality data is updated. If the occurrence of abnormality normal data is not identified is configured not to update the second abnormal data. In such a configuration, when the occurrence of abnormality is specified from the first abnormality data, the second abnormality data is updated, and when the occurrence of abnormality is not specified from the first abnormality data, the second abnormality data is not updated. Therefore, even if the abnormality is resolved and the first abnormality data is updated in the non-game program after the abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of the abnormality from the second abnormality data until the occurrence of the abnormality is confirmed on the game program side. Can be specified.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of performing abnormality determination and identifying the abnormality determination result in a non-game related process that is a non-game program called by a timer interrupt process (main) that is a game program. The medal-related error reference data is stored in the non-game RAM area as data. The medal-related error reference data is referred to as the first abnormality data stored in the non-game RAM area without performing the above process, and the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormality data As described above, the sensor error flag can be updated. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before performing other processing, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In such a configuration, after the non-game related process is performed, the process using the second abnormal data before being updated based on the first abnormal data is performed by another process. Can be prevented.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a configuration one. In such a configuration, when the signal output by the game program and the signal output by the non-game program are performed using a common output port, the output data of the signal set by the non-game program remains. As a result, there is a risk of being output as an output signal from the game program.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, Output ports 0 to 9 for outputting the game, and the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. Non-game program areas in which non-game programs that are not involved are stored. Control signals, control signals for the credit display 11, commands to the sub-control unit 91, etc. are provided. In the non-game program, output data is not set in the first output port (output ports 0-5, 7-9), and in the non-game program, output data, for example, a test signal is set. The program includes a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is not set, and the initialization of the first output port and the second output port is a game program start-up setting process or power interruption This is a configuration performed from processing (main). In such a configuration, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Are output separately in the game program, the output data is not set in the non-game program, and the output data is set in the non-game program. Since the output data of the signal set by the non-game program remains, it is output as an output signal by the game program. Game pros Independence between the control by the ram and the control by the non-game program can be ensured, and the initialization of the output port can be performed by initializing the first output port and the second output port from the game program. It can be simplified.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, output data is set in the game program, and output data is not set in the non-game program, the first output ports (output ports 0 to 5 and 7 to 9), Output data is set in the game program, and output data is not set in the game program, and the second output port (output port 6) is provided. 1 is configured to initialize the first output port and the second output port when it is established that power supply to 1 is started and that a power interruption is detected. With such a configuration, the control when the initialization condition is satisfied can be simplified.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, output data is set in the game program, and output data is not set in the non-game program, the first output ports (output ports 0 to 5 and 7 to 9), A configuration comprising a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is set in the game program and no output data is set in the game program, and a test signal is output from the second output port It is. With such a configuration, the capacity of the game program can be reduced by performing control in the non-game program for outputting a test signal that is not essential for progressing the game.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is readable and stored. The game RAM area is a game program and is initialized by a RAM initialization process called from an initial setting process or a main process. The non-game RAM area is a non-game program and is configured to be initialized by a non-game RAM area initialization process called from the initial setting process. In such a configuration, in the game program and the non-game program, the game data and the non-game data can be referred to each other. The independence between the control by the control and the control by the non-game program can be ensured.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored in a readable manner, and when the setting change process is performed, a game RAM area initialization process is performed to Is initialized while the non-game RAM area is not initialized. In such a configuration, even when a setting change process involving initialization of the game RAM area is performed, the non-game RAM area is not initialized, so the stored contents stored in the non-game RAM area, for example, It is possible to prevent initialization of data or the like for displaying a role ratio based on a game history on a predetermined display.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored so as to be readable and writable. And a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is readable and stored. The non-game RAM area is stored in the RAM 41c using RAM parity or RAM destructive diagnosis fixed data in the initial setting process. When the abnormality is determined and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the storage contents of the RAM 41c, all areas of the RAM 41c are initialized by performing a game RAM area initialization process and a non-game RAM area initialization process. . In such a configuration, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c can be initialized when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c and there is a possibility that the game control may not be performed normally. In addition, when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c, the non-game RAM area is initialized, so the storage content stored in the non-game RAM area that is not initialized even if the setting is changed, for example, a game Normalizing the data etc. for displaying the role ratio based on the history of the game on the predetermined display, it is possible to guarantee the normal operation of the processing based on the stored contents stored in the non-game RAM area. .

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a configuration one. In such a configuration, the non-game program detects an illegal passage of medals, but the game program only determines the passage of inserted medals, so the non-game program did not operate normally. In this case, there is a possibility that the passage of medals may be determined even if fraud is performed.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 which is a gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. And a storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. As a first condition in the game program, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. , The passage of medals that are gaming media is detected The medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal as the second condition in the non-game program. When the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, a second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting passage of a medal as a game medium is performed. The configuration is such that when the passage of the game medium is detected in both the first detection process and the second detection process, it is determined that the game medium to be added to the bet number and the credit has passed.

  In such a configuration, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, In the configuration in which the first condition is established in the game program, the first detection process for detecting the passage of the game medium when the first condition is satisfied, and the passage of the game medium is detected when the second condition is satisfied in the game program. Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes to be performed, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a first condition, when the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the medal that is the game medium is established. First detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and as the second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and the insertion is performed. The second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal that is a game medium is established when the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The second condition is a configuration that is established based on the state transition of the medal insertion signal that includes more information than the first condition. In such a configuration, fraud related to the passage of the game medium can be eliminated without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal as the second condition in the medal sensor check process which is a non-game program. In addition, the second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium is established when the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Yes, when the passage of the game medium is not normally detected by the second detection process, it is determined as abnormal and the medal related error reference data (E5) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect fraud related to the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a first condition, when the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the medal that is the game medium is established. First detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and as the second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and the insertion is performed. The second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal that is a game medium is established when the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. In the first detection process and the second detection process, a common insertion medal sensor 31a to 31c is used to detect the passage of a game medium. It is. In such a configuration, since the passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program for the common sensor, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program. it can.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by a timer interrupt process (main) that executes periodic processing at regular intervals. As a first condition, the inserted medal sensor 31b Alternatively, the first detection process (medal insertion signal process) for detecting the passage of a medal that is a game medium is performed by establishing that the confirmed data of 31c is ON and the input data is OFF. As two conditions, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal as a game medium is performed when A configuration, in the first detection processing and second detection processing is configured for detecting passage of game media with a detection state of the inserted medal sensor 31a~31c acquired in the same timer interruption process (main). In such a configuration, the passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the same timer interruption process (main). The passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity.

  Some conventional gaming machines are configured to perform control to repeatedly turn on and off, for example, blinking a backlight of a reel. In such a configuration, in order to perform control to repeatedly turn on and off the backlight of the reel, control is performed based on data that repeatedly turns on and off every predetermined number of interruptions, and data for that is required .

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 that is the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a predetermined time of electronic components, for example, a credit display 11 composed of a 7-segment display, and a game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to perform control that repeats ON control and OFF control, updates the timer value for measuring a predetermined time, calculates using the timer value and a specific value, and turns ON according to the result of the calculation. It is the structure which switches control and OFF control. In such a configuration, calculation is performed using a timer value for measuring a predetermined time and a specific value, and ON control and OFF control are switched according to the result of the calculation. Therefore, data for switching is separately required. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity for performing the control for repeating the on control and the off control.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can perform on-control and off-control on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 configured as a 7-segment display as electronic components, and blink them. Although it is a possible configuration, the main control unit 41 is a light emitting means other than a 7-segment display as an electronic component, for example, an LED or a lamp (in this embodiment, a waiting LED 19, a replaying LED 20, an effect LED 52, etc.) Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an operating means that operates by a solenoid or the like, a vibration means such as a vibrator, or the like is applied.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to switch between on control and off control according to the calculation result using the timer value and the specific value when performing the on control and the off control of the electronic component. However, the sub-control unit 91 and other control means may be configured to perform on-control and off-control of a predetermined electronic component in accordance with the calculation result using the timer value and the specific value.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment repeats the on-control and off-control of electronic components over a predetermined time by switching between on-control and off-control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value. The timer value is divided by a specific value, and the on control and the off control are switched according to the value of the least significant bit of the divided quotient. With such a configuration, it is possible to switch between on control and off control with a simple process.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to divide the timer value by a specific value and switch between on control and off control according to the value of the least significant bit of the divided quotient. For example, a configuration may be used in which the on control and the off control are switched according to the value of the least significant bit of the value obtained by shifting the timer value by a predetermined number of bits, or a configuration in which four arithmetic operations are performed.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment switches the on control and the off control according to the calculation result using the timer value and the specific value, thereby repeating the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. This is a configuration in which calculation is performed using a specific value every time the timer value is updated. With such a configuration, it is possible to switch between on control and off control with a simple process.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to calculate using the specific value every time the timer value is updated. However, the main control unit 41 calculates using the specific value every time the timer value is updated a predetermined number of times. The structure to do may be sufficient. In such a configuration, the processing load can be reduced by reducing the number of operations.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment switches the on control and the off control according to the calculation result using the timer value and the specific value, thereby repeating the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. The electronic component is a light emitting means such as a credit display 11, a game auxiliary display 12, a gaming machine information display 50, etc. configured by a 7-segment display. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity when the light emitting means is blinked for a predetermined time.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches the on control and the off control according to the calculation result using the timer value and the specific value, thereby repeating the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. -It is a configuration that performs off-control, and in the on-off control, the control that is performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the initial value of the timer value is the off-control. In such a configuration, even when on-off control is started for an electronic component that is in the on-control state, when the on-off control is started, the off-control is first performed, and then the on-control and off-control are performed. Since the control is repeated, it can be recognized that the on-off control is started.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 switches the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby controlling the on-off control for the electronic component over a predetermined time. In this on-off control, the control performed by the result of the calculation using the specific value with respect to the initial value of the timer value is set to off control. A configuration in which the control performed based on the calculation result using the specific value with respect to the initial value may be on-control. It is possible to recognize that the on-off control is started by adopting a configuration in which the on-off control is started after the off control is performed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment switches the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby repeating the on control and the off control of the electronic component over a predetermined time. -A configuration in which the off control is performed, and the control performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the final value of the timer value is the off control. In such a configuration, when the control at the end of the on-off control for the electronic component over a predetermined time is set to the off control, the control to turn on the electronic component is performed after the end of the on-off control. (For example, in the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the display contents displayed before the ratio display is displayed after performing the control of displaying the ratio display of the accessory by the display monitor data selection process. (For example, when displaying the credit, the number of payouts, the error code) or when displaying another ratio display after displaying one ratio display among a plurality of types of ratio display) Since the control to turn on after performing is performed, the separation between the on-off control and the subsequent on control can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 switches the on control and the off control according to the result of the calculation using the timer value and the specific value, thereby controlling the on-off control for the electronic component over a predetermined time. In this on-off control, the control performed based on the calculation result using the specific value for the final value of the timer value is set to off control. A configuration in which the control performed based on the result of the calculation using the specific value for the final value may be on control, and in such a configuration, when the on-off control for the electronic component is terminated, the electronic component is controlled to be off. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the separation between the on-off control and the subsequent on-control.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment gives a predetermined number of medals in accordance with the winning of a small role, and controls it advantageously for the player in accordance with the winning of a special role. The total accumulated payout number that is the total number of medals given in the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason, to the present, etc., or advantageously controlled during a specific period It is possible to count the number of paid-out items, which is the total number of medals awarded in the period (BB, RB). It is a configuration that can calculate a bonus payout ratio, which is a ratio, and can display the calculated bonus payout ratio on the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 so as to be specified. (In the present embodiment, it has a plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 that have different timings to reach 6000 games), and calculates a payout ratio using the count value of the corresponding counter every time a specific period is reached. In the period from the start of counting by the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 until the first specific period is reached, the display of the accessory payout ratio is blinked. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the item payout ratio displayed on the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 is not a normal value. Further, since each of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 having different timings for reaching the specific period is provided, after the first cumulative buffer reaches the specific period once, until the cumulative buffer reaches the next specific period. Without waiting, each time the other cumulative buffer reaches a specific period, the bonus payout ratio can be updated to the latest information.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout amount as a ratio display on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12. Although it is a structure which can be displayed, also in Example 1, similarly to Example 2, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number are calculated, and these ratios and ratios are displayed in the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12. It is good also as a structure which can be displayed on.

[Function and effect 2]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, Are separately assigned, and when executing a non-game program, a configuration is proposed in which the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when a non-game program is called from a game program, the register value is saved in the stack area for protection in the non-game program, and is saved when all processing based on the non-game program is completed. After the value is restored to the register, the game program is restored, but the value of the register after the value is updated by the instruction executed in connection with the call of the non-game program is saved. When returning, the register may return to a different state from when the non-game program is called.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 that is a gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored; The main CPU 41a executes processing based on the values stored in the plurality of registers, and the values of the plurality of registers are updated by the read instruction LD executed in association with the call of the non-game program. Processing included in the game program (main processing, including flag register) When calling a process (non-game RAM area initialization process, RT information output process, winning information output process, role monitor data process, medal sensor process, etc.) included in a non-game program from a dull insertion signal process, etc. The value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program by the calling game program, and the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program is set by the read instruction LD by the called non-game program. Thereafter, the values of all the plurality of registers are saved in the non-game stack area by the non-game program. In such a configuration, the RAM 41c is a non-game program area in which a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored. When the non-game program is called from the game program in the configuration in which the area is allocated separately, the value of the flag register whose value is updated by executing the read instruction LD is saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program using the read instruction LD by the non-game program, the values of all the registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the RAM 41c, so that the flag register value is stored in the game stack area. Evacuate and protect State, it is possible to perform a non-game program.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a is configured to save the value of the flag register to the game stack area by using the second save instruction (PUSH) by the game program when calling the non-game program from the game program. When calling a non-game program from a game program, the value of the flag register may be saved in a predetermined area other than the game stack area (for example, a game RAM area other than the game stack area, a back flag register, etc.). Further, when a non-game program is called from a game program, the game program may be configured to save values of a plurality of registers including at least a flag register.

  The main CPU 41a of this embodiment uses a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all of the plurality of registers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers as the stack pointer SP. Can execute a plurality of instructions including a second save instruction (PUSH AF) that is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the second save instruction that saves only the value of the flag register is all in the plurality of registers. The program capacity is smaller than that of the first save instruction for saving the value of. In such a configuration, the value of the flag register is saved using the second save instruction in the game program, and the values of all of the plurality of registers are saved using the first save instruction in the non-game program. Capacity can be reduced.

  The main CPU 41a of this embodiment can execute a read instruction LD for reading data stored in a designated area to another designated area, and the stack pointer SP is set using the read instruction LD. The indicated value can be read and stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c, and the value stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c can be read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. When the main CPU 41a calls the non-game program from the game program, the game program stores the value of the flag register including the second zero flag in the RAM 41c. Of the value stored in the flag register. Second zero flag value is updated by the execution of the output instruction LD is a construction is provided without value used to determine for the program run in the gaming program. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by the execution of the read instruction LD is a value that is not used for the determination by the game program, but includes the second zero flag when calling the non-game program. By saving and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent an unintended operation from being performed when the game program returns from the non-game program.

  The main CPU 41a of this embodiment is included in the game program, and includes a main process that performs basic processing and a timer interrupt process (main) that can be interrupted during execution of the main process. The process can be executed, and when calling the process (winning information output process, role monitoring data process, medal sensor process, etc.) included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the value of the flag register is changed. After saving to the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the timer interrupt processing (main) interrupt is prohibited. In such a configuration, the period during which interruption is prohibited when calling a non-game program can be shortened as much as possible. In addition, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing timer interrupt processing (main) after saving the value of the flag register.

  In this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a calls the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register in the game stack area and then performs timer interrupt processing (main). However, when the main CPU 41a calls the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a before saving the value of the flag register to the game stack area of the RAM 41c. The timer interrupt processing (main) interrupt may be prohibited. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing timer interrupt processing (main) after saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, Are separately assigned, and when a non-game program is executed, the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the timer interrupt is prohibited in advance, and when the processing based on the non-game program is completed and the game program is restored, the timer interrupt prohibition is canceled. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed during the execution of the non-game program, but there is a possibility that the execution of the timer interrupt may be delayed due to the prohibition of the timer interrupt accompanying the execution of the non-game program. .

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 that is a gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored; The main CPU 41a performs basic processing (main processing, game start waiting processing included in the main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) and an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the basic processing is satisfied. Timer interrupt processing (main) that can execute processing by interrupting the basic processing. Possible, basic processing, processing included in the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) to processing included in the non-game program (winning information output processing, medal sensor processing, role monitoring data processing) When calling a timer interrupt processing during execution of a non-game program and before performing a series of processes including a process of calling a non-game program from a game program, a timer interrupt process ( By executing a series of processes including a process of calling a non-game program from the game program after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, It is the structure which calls a game program. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41, there are a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which the stored non-game program area is separately allocated, timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited when calling the non-game program from the game program, and before calling the non-game program from the game program, Since the non-game program is called after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed after executing the interrupt once wait process, the game program can execute the non-game in a sufficient period until the next interrupt condition is satisfied. A series of processes including the process of calling a program is performed. Becomes the non-game program is invoked and executed by, by the interrupt with the execution of the non-game program is prohibited can be prevented that the execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) will be delayed.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a calls the medal sensor process included in the non-game program from the medal insertion signal process, which is a part of the main process included in the game program, or the RT information output process from the main process. When calling, the non-game program is called from the game program before the non-game program is called, and the non-game program is called after the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The non-game program is called after a plurality of processes included in the game program are performed. However, when the non-game program is called from the game program, a single interruption process is performed immediately before the non-game program is called. A configuration may be used, and with such a configuration, the non-game program is executed. In a state in which the interrupt is inhibited, it can be reliably prevented that the interrupt condition is satisfied.

  The main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment is configured so that the main process for executing the basic process and a timer interrupt that can execute the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process is satisfied. Process (main) can be executed, and when a non-game program is called from the main process, after executing the interrupt once wait process, the non-game program is called, and the main program included in the game program The ratio monitor data process included in the non-game program called from the process is a process that requires a predetermined time for execution (time that can exceed the timing at which an interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt process (main)) occurs. is there. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) from being delayed even if the period during which the timer interruption is prohibited due to the execution of the non-game program becomes long.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a main process included in the game program and a timer that can execute the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process is satisfied. Processing including interrupt processing (main), and the main processing calls the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program via the game start waiting processing included in the game program, and from the medal insertion signal processing It is possible to call the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, and in the game start waiting process before calling the medal sensor process from the medal insertion signal process, a single interrupt process is executed and a timer interrupt process (main) In this configuration, the medal sensor process is called after the Port input processing for updating input data of various switches (for example, start switch 7) and sensors (for example, inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c) is executed. This is a configuration in which the loading status is determined. In such a configuration, the medal sensor process included in the non-game program can be executed with reference to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt process (main).

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, slots for setting bets using game balls as game values. The present invention may be applied to a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that sets a bet amount using only credit as a gaming value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines are also described. Is a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball in the game area, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game This is also applicable to a gaming machine or the like having a configuration in which the non-game program area in which is stored is separately allocated to the ROM. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that has a configuration in which an electronic component is controlled to be turned on and off repeatedly, such as blinking an effect LED.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a) for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area for storing a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game;
Including
The control means executes processing based on values stored in a plurality of registers,
The plurality of registers include a specific register (flag register) whose value is updated by a predetermined instruction (read instruction LD) executed in association with the calling of the non-game program,
When the non-game program (RT information output process, winning information output process, role ratio monitoring data process, medal sensor process) is called from the game program, the game program uses the value of the specific register by the game program. Saving to the game stack area, setting a stack pointer of the non-game stack area used by the non-game program by the non-game program, and then saving all values of the plurality of registers to the non-game stack area. It is a feature.
According to this feature, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, When a non-game program is called from a game program, the value of a specific register whose value is updated by execution of a predetermined instruction is saved in the game stack area used by the game program, and the non-game program After setting the stack pointer of the non-game stack area used by the non-game program, all register values are saved to the non-game stack area, so the specific register values are saved to the game stack area and protected. Thus, the non-game program can be executed.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 1-1,
The instruction for saving the value of the specific register (flag register) (second save instruction PUSH AF) has a smaller program capacity than the instruction for saving the values of all the plurality of registers (first save instruction PUSH ALL). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the capacity of the game program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-1 or 1-2,
Of the values stored in the specific register (flag register), the value updated by execution of the predetermined instruction (read instruction LD) (the value of the second zero flag) is a value that is not used for the determination of the game program. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the value updated by the execution of the predetermined instruction is a value that is not used for the determination of the game program, but an unintended operation is performed by protecting when calling the non-game program. Can be reliably prevented.

A gaming machine according to configuration 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-3,
The control means (main CPU 41a)
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of interrupting and executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) during execution of the basic processing;
Including
When the non-game program (for example, winning information output process, role ratio monitoring data process, medal sensor process) is called from the game program in the basic process, the game program sets the value of the specific register (flag register). It is characterized by prohibiting interrupts before retreating to the game stack area to be used.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the specific register from being changed by the interrupt process after the value of the specific register is saved in the game stack area.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-1 to 1-3,
The control means includes
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of interrupting and executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) during execution of the basic processing;
Including
When the non-game program (winning information output process, role monitoring data process, medal sensor process non-game related process) is called from the game program in the basic process, the value of the specific register (flag register) is set to the game It is characterized by prohibiting interrupts after saving to the game stack area used by the program.
According to this feature, the period during which interruption is prohibited when calling a non-game program can be shortened as much as possible.

A gaming machine of Configuration 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any of Configurations 1-1 to 1-5,
The control means (main CPU 41a) can execute a control command based on a program,
The control instruction is a predetermined call instruction for calling a program stored in a storage area specified by an address consisting of a specified value specified in a program and a predetermined value stored in a predetermined value area (vector table area) in advance. CALLV instruction, RST instruction)
In the game program, the program is called using a predetermined call instruction,
In the non-game program, the program is called without using a predetermined call instruction.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a game program area from being inadvertently accessed by a non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means (main CPU 41a) for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area of the storage means (ROM 41b) is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area for storing a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game;
Including
The control means includes
Basic processing execution means for executing basic processing (main processing);
Interrupt processing execution means capable of interrupting the basic processing and executing interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the basic processing is satisfied;
Including
When calling the non-game program (ratio monitoring data processing, medal sensor processing) from the game program in the basic processing, interrupts are prohibited during execution of the non-game program,
Before calling the non-game program from the game program in the basic process, execute a standby process (waiting once interrupt) until the interrupt condition is satisfied and the interrupt process is executed, The non-game program is called after the interruption process is executed.
According to this feature, a game program area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, In the configuration in which the non-game program is called from the game program, the interrupt condition is established and the interrupt process is established before the non-game program is called from the game program in the basic process. Since the non-game program is called after the wait process is executed and the interrupt process is executed, the non-game program is executed in a sufficient period until the next interrupt condition is satisfied. Therefore, interrupts are prohibited when the non-game program is executed. There can be prevented from being delayed.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 2-1,
The non-game program (role ratio monitoring data process, medal sensor process) called from the game program (main process) in the basic process (main process) is a process that takes a predetermined time to execute.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the execution of the interrupt process from being delayed even if the period during which the interrupt is prohibited is increased due to the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-3 is the gaming machine described in configuration 2-1 or 2-2,
Processing related to updating predetermined data (input data) (port input processing) is executed in the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)),
In the non-game program (medal sensor process), a process of referring to the predetermined data is executed.
According to this feature, the non-game program can be executed with reference to the latest predetermined data updated in the interrupt process.

A gaming machine having configuration 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-3,
When calling the non-game program (for example, winning information output processing, role ratio monitoring data processing, medal sensor processing) from the gaming program (for example, main processing, medal insertion signal processing) in the basic processing (main processing) The interrupt is prohibited before the value of the specific register (flag register) is saved in the game stack area used by the game program.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the specific register from being changed by the interrupt process after the value of the specific register is saved in the game stack area.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-3,
When the non-game program (winning information output process, role monitoring data process, medal sensor process) is called from the game program (main process, medal insertion signal process) in the basic process, a specific register (flag register) An interrupt is prohibited after the value is saved in the game stack area used by the game program.
According to this feature, the period during which interruption is prohibited when calling a non-game program can be shortened as much as possible.

A gaming machine of configuration 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-5,
The control means (main CPU 41a) can execute a control command based on a program,
The control instruction is a predetermined call instruction for calling a program stored in a storage area specified by an address consisting of a specified value specified in a program and a predetermined value stored in a predetermined value area (vector table area) in advance. CALLV instruction, RST instruction)
In the game program, the program is called using a predetermined call instruction,
In the non-game program, the program is called without using a predetermined call instruction.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a game program area from being inadvertently accessed by a non-game program.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  The main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment displays the payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout count, which are tabulated by the payout ratio monitor data processing, as a ratio display, and the credit indicator 11 The main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment includes a gaming machine information display 50 including a 7-segment display on the gaming control board 40. The gaming machine information display 50 displays a ratio display such as a bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and a bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment is configured to display, as the ratio display, the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout count by the bonus ratio monitor data processing. However, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment displays, as a ratio display, an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a role between the past 6000 games. The payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number are displayed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the first embodiment is configured to tabulate data for performing the ratio display using the three cumulative buffers 1 to 3 that can count data related to the payout of medals for 6000 games. The main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment is configured to aggregate data for performing the ratio display using five ring buffers provided with 15 sets of buffers capable of storing 2 bytes of data in one set. is there.

  Hereinafter, the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 31, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a lower part on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40 is configured with a 7-segment display. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged. The gaming machine information display 50 is capable of visually recognizing display contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state in which the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and is aggregated by the main control unit 41, A store clerk or the like can recognize information such as an advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50.

  For this reason, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a with the front door 1b opened. Moreover, the visibility of the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered inside the housing 1a. Specifically, in the display side position of the gaming machine information display 50, there are no parts such as reels provided in the slot machine 1 and other boards, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided. The wirings that connect the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 do not pass through the positions. In addition, in the board case 120a for storing the game control board 40 on which the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted, an entry part for writing a seal sticker or an opening person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40 Such as a label on which the information is displayed, a sticking part to which the label is stuck, a display part on which the information is printed or engraved, a heat radiating hole, a heat radiating fan, or the like. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

  In addition, the board case 120a is sealed after the game control board 40 is accommodated, and in the sealed state, the board case 120a cannot be released without being released without leaving a trace. It has become. As a sealing method, there are a method of sealing a sealing piece with a one-way screw, welding a part of a case, or sticking a seal seal that leaves a peeled mark. Thereby, the connection line connecting the gaming machine information display 50 and the gaming control board 40 is disconnected, and the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a displays correctly. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed or to prevent a fraud in which visibility is hindered by sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display 50.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and an accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games. The gaming machine information display 50 displays an advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and an advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Take control.

  The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to the advantageous section related to AT among the past 6000 games. The advantageous interval related to the AT is a period from the time when the AT is won in the AT non-winning state to the time when all the AT controls associated with the selected AT are completed and the AT shifts to the non-AT. The advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is a game controlled in the advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games, which is the cumulative number of games since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. Number ratio. The combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out during the BB controlled between the past 6000 games in the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations to be paid out. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the amount paid out during BB and RB controlled during the past 6000 games, which occupy the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of paid-out items, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled during the past 6000 games in the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts that is the cumulative number of medals awarded. The combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is due to factory shipments or for some reason in the total cumulative number of payouts, which is the total number of medals paid out since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason. This is the ratio of the combined payout number that is the total of the number of medals paid out during the BB controlled from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c to the present. The payout ratio relative to the total cumulative number of payouts is paid out during the BB and RB controlled from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the total cumulative payout at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of paid-out items, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the present time at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts that is the cumulative number of medals awarded.

  In this embodiment, as a bonus, only RB and BB in which RB continuously operates are mounted. However, all types of small roles are permitted, but some reels are drawn. However, when the CT is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CT is reflected in the bonus payout ratio. When the CB is mounted, the number of medals paid out during the CB is reflected in the combined payout ratio.

  The main control unit 41, after turning on the power, during the period until the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the past 6000 games FIG. 32 shows the feature payout ratio between the past, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the feature payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Are switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) in the display order shown in FIG.

  At this time, in the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation (for example, an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed in the upper two digits is displayed. 1A ") is displayed. The abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is that the display content of the lowest digit among the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (in this example, the letters “A”, “C”, and “F”). In the gaming machine information display 50, when the abbreviation, the ratio, and the ratio are displayed, the numerical portion of the abbreviation is not adjacent to the ratio and the ratio. Thereby, it can prevent that the display content of a ratio and a ratio will be misidentified by the number part of an abbreviation, a ratio, and a ratio adjoining.

  At this time, the gaming machine information display 50 displays a ratio and a ratio (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as data to be displayed) corresponding to the above-described abbreviations in the last two digits. The data is also displayed in%. As data displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, 0 to 99% will be displayed. In this embodiment, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are used for display. For example, when the data to be displayed is one digit, “0” is displayed in the upper digit among the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. The value of the data to be displayed is displayed in the lower digit (for example, when 5% is displayed, “05” is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). When the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50 "15" is displayed in the last two digits.) Thus, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, the data to be displayed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 By displaying, it can prevent that the display content of a ratio and a ratio will be misidentified. Moreover, regardless of whether it is 1 digit or 2 digits, the lower 2 digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed by displaying data to be displayed using both lower 2 digits of the gaming machine information display 50. One of the data is displayed in the digit. For example, when the data is not displayed on one of the lower two digits display, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

  It should be noted that the abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is changed so that the display content of the highest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (for example, “A1”). In the configuration in which the abbreviation is displayed in the last two digits in 50 and the data to be currently displayed (for example, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games) is displayed in the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display 50 It is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being mistaken when the portion and the ratio and the ratio are adjacent to each other.

  Moreover, regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display device 50, the two digits for displaying the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed. Even in the configuration in which the two-digit colors are made different, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being misidentified due to the abbreviated number portion, the ratio and the ratio being adjacent to each other.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. When the display is switched and displayed every predetermined period in the display order shown, the game is progressed and the values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed. Even if it exists, it restrict | limits updating to a new value, and makes a round of a display using an original value. Specifically, when the game is progressed and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed, a new value is calculated and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. When the display is completed using the original value and the display of one cycle is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer, and then the display may be performed with the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is completed, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted by limiting the calculation for obtaining the new values. Make one round When the display of completed, performs a computation for obtaining a new value, then, it may be performed display in the gaming machine information display 50 by using the new values. By doing so, it is possible to prevent display contents such as advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 complete.

  Also, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, normal) when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games exceed a specified ratio (for example, 70%). If it is always lit, the percentage of advantageous sections will be displayed by flashing). Further, the main control unit 41 displays a display mode (for example, different from normal) when the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed a specified ratio (for example, 60%). If it is normally lit, the combined payout ratio is displayed by flashing). Further, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, for example, when the item payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts exceed a specified ratio (for example, 70%). If the normal lighting is always on, blinking lighting etc.) is displayed. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, for example, when the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number exceed a specified ratio (for example, 80%). If normal is always lit, blinking lit etc.) will display the advantageous section payout ratio.

  In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, consecutive-action payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, it is displayed in a display mode different from normal, and the state of gambling is high. You can now warn you that you may be in control.

  The main control unit 41 also displays the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games. In the case of displaying on the display device 50, when the past number of games has not reached 6000 games, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display device 50 is blinked. By controlling the mode, it can be recognized that the total has not reached 6000 games, and the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased can be recognized.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games on the gaming machine information display 50, the number of games for which the past number of games converges to the slot machine design value of the advantageous section ratio approximately. (For example, 175000 games) is not reached, for example, by controlling the display mode different from normal, such as blinking the upper two digits display of the gaming machine information display 50, the advantageous section ratio Can be recognized that it has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased Yes.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays the combined payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number on the gaming machine information display 50, the past control number is such that the combined payout ratio converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 17500 games) has not been reached, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is blinked, for example, by controlling to a display mode different from normal, It is possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased It has become.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays on the gaming machine information display 50 the bonus payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the regulation that the past game number converges to the design value of the slot machine for the bonus game payout ratio. When the number of games (for example, 6000 games) has not been reached, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display device 50 is blinked. It is possible to recognize that the item payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converge to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased It has become.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 displays the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number on the gaming machine information display 50, the prescription is such that the past number of games has the advantageous section payout ratio approximately converged to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 175000 games) has not been reached, it is advantageous to control the display mode to be different from normal, for example, by blinking the upper two digits on the gaming machine information display 50. It is possible to recognize that the section payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased It has become.

  The main control unit 41 displays “00” in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 in a state where the 6000 game has not been reached, and displays gaming machine information in a state after reaching the 6000 game. The ratio and ratio to be displayed in the lower two digits of the device 50 are displayed, that is, in the state after reaching the 6000 game, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display mode after the 6000 game. Is preferably configured to have a different display mode. With such a configuration, in the state where 6000 games have not been reached, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, “1A”) are displayed. ) Can be recognized that the total of the advantageous section ratio and the like specified by) has not reached 6000 games, and the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased can be recognized. In addition, in a state where the 6000 game has not been reached, “00” is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, so that in a state where the 6000 game has not been reached, the gaming machine information display is always displayed. Data is displayed in the lower two digits of the display 50. For example, when data is not displayed on one of the lower two digits, an abnormality of the display can be recognized.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games To determine whether the data used to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is normal When it is determined that there is an abnormality (such as when the number of items paid out, the number of consecutive items paid out, or the number of advantageous sections paid out is greater than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repeat)) In this case, the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and a display (for example, “FFFF”) indicating that the abnormality is detected on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. By being adapted to inform the fact, the calculation of these data is made to recognize that it is not normally performed.

  In addition, when initializing data determined to be abnormal and data related to the data, for example, among the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games When it is determined that at least one of the above is abnormal, the data regarding all of these may be initialized, or only a part of the data may be initialized. If it is determined that at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is abnormal, the data regarding all of them is initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in a part of the data for the past 6000 games, all of the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games are initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative number of games When an abnormality is determined, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

  In addition, it is determined whether the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal. If this happens, a notification to that effect is made, and then a predetermined operation (for example, switches such as start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc. are operated in a predetermined procedure). In this way, initialization regarding the data may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification that the abnormality is determined, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may display that the abnormality is detected (for example, “FFFF”) and notify that fact. If an abnormality is determined, a command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 side informs that the abnormality is determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do it.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 starts a period from the start of data collection until it reaches 6000 games, that is, an advantageous interval ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous interval ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, and a continuous interval between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, bonus payout ratio between past 6000 games, advantageous segment payout ratio between past 6000 games, continuous payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payout ratio, payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payout ratio, advantage over total cumulative payout count In a period when data for calculating the section payout ratio or the like is insufficient, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed in a mode different from the display mode after 6000 games after data collection is started. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the data for calculating the display content is an insufficient period.

  In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, during the period until the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 Predetermined ratios of bonuses between games, favorable payout ratio between past 6000 games, continuous payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payout ratio, payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payout The display is switched for each period, but is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or a predetermined operation switch (for example, the reset / setting switch 38) is operated. Displayed only when detected, displayed when not in game, displayed during setting change status or setting confirmation Or Unishi may be or to appear after the power is turned on only for a predetermined period. Further, instead of automatically switching every predetermined period, the display contents may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the gaming machine information indicates that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is determined or that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. Although it is the structure alert | reported using the indicator 50, the command which can specify that is transmitted to the sub-control part 91, and it may also be made to confirm with the indicator and presentation apparatus which the sub-control part 91 controls good.

  Also, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and between the past 6000 games The gaming machine information display 50 displays an advantageous section payout ratio, a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and an advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. In addition to these displays, it is possible to recognize that the RAM 41c has been initialized by a setting change, or that a disconnection of a wiring (such as a backup power supply wiring) provided in the slot machine 1 has been detected. The contents may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In particular, if the setting is changed during a bonus, advantageous section or bonus carryover, and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus being carried over is cleared, the game is defined while the bonus is carried over. It has been performed more than a few times, or an operation that intentionally ends the advantageous section has been performed (for example, in RT2 or RT3 during AT, RT1 transition replay or SB is deliberately won, or a specific symbol is stopped When an operation for shifting to RT1 is performed, that is, when a game state that is intentionally shifted from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a disadvantaged gaming state is detected, and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected When the possibility of not being normally connected due to the occurrence of the error or the like is detected, the fact is notified in a identifiable manner. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. .

  In addition, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data as will be described later, when the total cumulative data is initialized, the fact that the advantageous section ratio, the bonus payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that the information is illegally operated so that correct information is not displayed as the combined service payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and in this way, overflow is avoided. It is possible to recognize that the total accumulated data has been initialized by the processing to be performed separately from initialization by an illegal operation for preventing correct information from being displayed as an advantageous section ratio or the like.

  In addition, as described above, if there is a possibility that an illegal operation is performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc., that fact is detected. Then, the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and is not notified at the time of the detection. Thereafter, a predetermined operation (for example, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc.) is performed. By operating the switches according to a predetermined procedure and connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40), these histories are provided on the main control unit 41 side. Can be confirmed by a display (for example, gaming machine information display 50), a display (for example, liquid crystal display 51) provided on the sub-control unit 91 side, a display external to the slot machine 1, etc. It may be so.

  In addition, the settings are changed, the disconnection is detected, the connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 is generated, and the correct section ratio, the item payout ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are correct. There is a possibility that information may not be displayed, and as described above, there is a possibility that the information has been illegally manipulated so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a combined payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. This may be confirmed by a display device or an effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. In addition, during bonus, advantageous section or during carryover of bonus, the bonus or advantageous section was forcibly terminated, the bonus being carried over was cleared, advantageous section ratio, bonus payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records a history that it has been detected that there is a possibility of incorrect operation so that correct information is not displayed as a combined service payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. You may be able to check the history of

  Next, a method for counting and calculating data for the main control unit 41 to display such information will be described.

  The main control unit 41 aggregates and calculates information related to the slot machine 1 such as the above-described advantageous section ratio, and displays information based on the calculation result on the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40. A gaming machine information display process can be executed as the process. The program for performing the gaming machine information display process is included in the above-mentioned non-game program, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the gaming machine information display process is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b. It is remembered. The main control unit 41 uses the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c as a work when executing the gaming machine information display process. Note that the non-game RAM area used when the main control unit 41 executes the gaming machine information display process is backed up by a backup power source, and even if power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, As long as power is supplied, the stored contents of the non-game RAM area are preserved. In addition, the main control unit 41 is initialized as the data stored in the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c by performing the operation of changing the setting value as described above. The non-game RAM area used when executing the game is not targeted for initialization when an operation for changing a set value is performed or when an initialization condition is established for another game RAM area. In particular, the information for summing up, calculating, and displaying information regarding the slot machine 1 such as the above-described advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

[Aggregating data displayed on the gaming machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 33, in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a game number counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is incremented by one and specified. A first game number counter that is initialized every time period (6000 games in this embodiment) elapses, and 1 is added for each game, and a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is added to a predetermined number (books). In the embodiment, a second game number counter that is initialized every time the predetermined period divided by 15) (400 games in the present embodiment) elapses is incremented by 1 for each game. A third game number counter is provided. 1st to 5th data buffer that can count 1 set of data, 1st to 5th ring buffer with 15 sets of buffers that can store 2 bytes of data in 1 set are set Has been.

  The main control unit 41 uses the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers to determine the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). In the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment), in the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment), in the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment) In the period controlled by the BB, the number of consecutive payouts, which is the number of medals awarded, and the advantageous period controlled by the AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (the AT controls after winning the AT) The number of medals awarded during the period from when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is terminated), a specific period (this implementation) Is the number of games in the advantageous period controlled by the AT (the period from the time when the AT is won to the time when the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT control is terminated). It is possible to count the number of game section games.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals paid out to the first data count buffer when the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role, and BB or RB In the period controlled by BB, when medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role, the number of medals paid out is added to the second data count buffer, and in the period controlled by BB, When a medal is paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role, the number of medals paid out is added to the third data counting buffer, and an advantageous section controlled by AT (after winning AT and then controlled by AT) When the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role during the period from when the AT game is reduced to 0 and the AT control is ended), the number of medals paid out is set to the fourth number. Add to data counting buffer When a game is played during an advantageous period controlled by the AT (the period from when the AT is won to when the AT is controlled until the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT is terminated) One game is added to the fifth data counting buffer. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the first to fourth data counting buffers at the timing when occurrence of the small prize winning is determined. The timing at which the number of medals is added to the data count buffer may be the timing at which medals are actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (addition of credits or detection of actual medal payout).

  Then, every time it is specified that the predetermined period has passed based on the second game number counter, a predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (previously updated set + 1 set buffer) When the first or last updated set is the 15th set, the first set buffer) is initialized, and the first to fifth data count counter values are set to the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers. In addition to adding to the buffer, the first to fifth data count buffer values are respectively added to the 3-byte aggregate data areas A ′ to D ′ and F ′ provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Also, the 3-byte aggregate data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′ provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and all the first to fifteenth sets of the first to fifth ring buffers are initialized. The set buffer data is sequentially added to the corresponding aggregated data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′. Thereafter, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. Also, the total data area E ′ is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

  By performing these processes, the data of the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers, the total data areas a ′ to d ′, f ′, and A ′ to F ′ are updated for each predetermined period. The information will be updated.

  Further, each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregate data areas a ′ to d ′ and A ′ to D ′ to the latest information, and then Of these, it is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregate data areas a ′ and A ′ has reached 3 bytes. For data that has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregate data areas a ′ and A ′ is determined. Are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas a and A provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. On the other hand, an extraction process for extracting predetermined 16-bit data is performed on the data reaching 3 bytes, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the extraction process, the highest rank is specified by referring to the data in the total data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is determined in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Set to area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

  In addition, for b ′ to d ′ of the total data area, a primary calculation of 3 bytes provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is obtained by multiplying the data of the total data areas b ′ to d ′ by 100 respectively. Data areas b ″ to d ″ are set respectively. Thereafter, it is referred to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area a. When the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area a, the data of the total data area b ″ to d ″ is stored in the RAM 41c. They are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas b to d provided in the game RAM area. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area a, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area a is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas b to d.

  In addition, for B ′ to D ′ in the total data area, a primary calculation of 3 bytes provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41 c is obtained by multiplying the data of the total data areas B ′ to D ′ by 100 respectively. Data areas B "to D" are set respectively. Thereafter, whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area A is referred to. If the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area A, the data of the total data area B ″ to D ″ is stored in the RAM 41c. They are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas B to D provided in the game RAM area. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area A, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area A is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas B to D.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area b by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, so that the ratio of the total payout number in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is obtained. By calculating and dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of bonuses in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated, and the secondary calculation data area By dividing the data of d by the data of the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the advantageous section payout number in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated.

  Further, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area B by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the total payout number in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area B is calculated. Then, by dividing by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the total number of bonuses in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area C is converted into the data in the secondary calculation data area A. By dividing, the ratio of the cumulative number of consecutive combinations in the slot machine 1 is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area D by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the total in the slot machine 1 is calculated. The ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts is calculated.

  The main control unit 41 updates the total data areas f ′, E ′, and F ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then calculates the total data in the total data area. It is determined whether or not the data set in the area E ′ has reached 3 bytes. If the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the total data area E ′ is provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The 2-byte secondary calculation data area E is set. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area E. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the extraction process, the highest rank is specified by referring to the data in the total data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is determined in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Set to area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

  For the total data area f ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data area f ′ by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area f ″ provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, it is determined whether or not the data set in the total data area f ″ has reached 3 bytes. If the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the total data area f ″ is stored in the non-game RAM of the RAM 41c. Set to the 2-byte secondary calculation data area f provided in the area, whereas if it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set to the corresponding secondary calculation data area f. .

  Further, referring to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area f, and when the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area f, 6000 which is the number of games in a predetermined period is set to the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area g provided in the. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area f, the extraction process is performed for 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, the top level specified in the extraction process for the total data area f is specified, Data of 16 bits below the most significant are extracted and set in the secondary operation data area g.

  For the total data area F ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data area F ′ by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area F ″ provided in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, referring to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area E, and if the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area E, the data of the total data area F ″ is stored in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary calculation data area F. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area E, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area E is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area F.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area F by the data in the secondary calculation data area E, thereby calculating the ratio of the advantageous section game count in the total number of games in the slot machine 1. Then, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area f by the secondary calculation data area g, the ratio of the number of advantageous section games in the predetermined period is calculated.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area every predetermined time, and determines the ratio of the total payout number for the predetermined period, the ratio of the total payout number for the total cumulative period, and the combined payout number for the predetermined period. Ratio, percentage of the number of items paid out during the specified period, percentage of the number of advantageous sections paid out during the predetermined period, percentage of the total cumulative number of consecutive payouts, percentage of the total cumulative number of items paid out, By specifying the ratio and setting it in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50, it is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  The main control unit 41 calculates secondary calculation data based on the data in the first to fifth ring buffers when a predetermined period elapses, that is, updates the secondary calculation data every time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, until the predetermined period elapses, the previously calculated secondary calculation data is maintained, and based on the secondary calculation data, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the total payout number and the like. After the elapse of time, until the next predetermined period elapses, the total payout number and the like when the previous predetermined period elapses are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In addition to the total number of payouts and the like described above, the number of advantageous section games and the total number of advantageous section games for a predetermined period are specified and set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 for each predetermined time. It is good also as a structure displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, a process for avoiding the overflow is executed, Delete related data once.

  Specifically, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and data related to the total cumulative data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total accumulated data that has reached the specified number is all the data used in the calculation (in this embodiment, the total number of paid items, the number of bonus items to be paid, the number of consecutively paid items, the number of games, the advantageous interval game All of the total data of the number of times) may be initialized, or a part of relatively highly relevant data (for example, the total data A ′ of the total number of payouts reaches the specified number as the total cumulative data) Includes the combined data B ′ ratio of the combined payout number used together with the total data A ′ in the calculation of the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, When the total data D ′ of the advantageous section payout number and the total data E ′ of the number of games as the total accumulated data reach the specified number, they are used together with the total data E ′ when calculating the advantageous section ratio (F / E). Advantageous section game times Summing data F ') may be to initialize.

  When the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and the data related to the total cumulative data are decreased by a predetermined ratio (for example, the total cumulative data By multiplying the current value by 0.5, etc.), it is possible to avoid overflow of the total cumulative data. At this time, the total cumulative data reaching the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data It is possible to reduce all of the data at a predetermined ratio, or reduce the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and some data that is relatively related to the total cumulative data at a predetermined ratio. Anyway.

  In addition, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized or reduced, etc. The specified number may be the maximum value of the total cumulative data (the maximum value that can be stored in each total data area (3 bytes) of the RAM 41c), or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of the total cumulative data ( The value may be a good value within 3 bytes, such as “16000000 (decimal number)”.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the total accumulated data of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is related once as a process for avoiding the overflow. Although it is the structure which erases data, the structure which stops a count may be sufficient, without erasing related data.

  Further, the data displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 may be executed for each game, or may be executed only for a game in which a winning has occurred.

  Since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform calculation after the decimal point, in this embodiment, the calculation is performed using the following first calculation method. In the first calculation method, first, the value of the numerator is multiplied by 100. Then, the value multiplied by 100 is divided by the denominator value. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculation after the decimal point. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Note that the following second calculation method may be used as a calculation method performed by a microcomputer that cannot perform calculation after the decimal point. In the second calculation method, first, the denominator value is divided by 100. Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculation after the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  Further, a microcomputer used in a gaming machine can only perform a calculation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate the calculation, lower bits are truncated as necessary. By using such a calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However, as the period for calculation becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original numerical value. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the calculation is performed using the value as it is without truncating the lower bits, and the value to be calculated is 2 bytes. When exceeding, the calculation is performed using the value obtained by rounding down the lower bits.

  In the conventional slot machine, the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  However, in such a conventional method, it is difficult to confirm whether or not it is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value after being installed in a game store.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the specific period occupying the total number of medals given in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment, or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present). Since the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are ratios of the total number of medals awarded during the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section), are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even after the slot machine 1 is shipped to the market, it can be confirmed whether or not the slot machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games controlled in the advantageous period (advantageous section) in a specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). Since the advantageous section ratio, which is a ratio, is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm the information indicating the degree of gambling after being shipped to the market.

  In the present embodiment, the advantage is the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous period in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). The section ratio is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, but it is a specific period (the period from the past 6000 games, factory shipment, or the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason to the present). The ratio of the number of games controlled by bonuses such as BB, RB, and the like may be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, and even in such a configuration, the degree of euphoria after being shipped to the market Can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). When calculating the ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not these source data satisfy the predetermined condition. The optimal calculation method can be selected according to the data to be obtained. For example, if the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section of the specific period are within 2 bytes, the data used as the basis of calculation is used as it is without being processed. While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section of the specified period exceed 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes. By calculating the combined service payout ratio, the serviced item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the serviced goods payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated by an optimum calculation method with less error.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous interval) in the first period to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between the past 6000 games). The combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, and the total number of medals awarded in the second period (from the factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present) The combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded during the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the second period, are calculated, respectively. In addition to being displayed on the display device 50, the combined payout in the second period is also calculated when calculating the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period. Even when calculating the ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by a common calculation method. The method of calculating the combined service payout ratio, the serviced item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. 5 may be different from the method of calculating the combined service payout ratio, serviced item payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. good. For example, in the above example, when calculating the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 so that the result becomes%, but the denominator is increased by 1/100. If the result is%, the total number of payouts in the first period can be kept within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, when calculating the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the data that is the basis of the calculation is used as it is without being processed. While calculating the ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period, the calculation source data is 2 By processing the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio after processing into data within bytes, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, An advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated.

  In the present embodiment, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). Since the data used for calculating the ratio is stored separately from the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous period in the specified period, the combined payout ratio, the item payout ratio, and the advantageous period in the specified period The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined game in which the number of specific games is divided by a predetermined number (15) in calculating the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games). 15 sets for storing the total number of payouts for a period of 400 games, the number of payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, the number of consecutive payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, and the number of advantageous sections of a predetermined number of games The total number of payouts in a specific game number period is obtained by adding together the total payout number, the item payout number, the continuous function payout number, and the advantageous section payout number stored in these ring buffers. , Calculate the number of items to be paid out, the number of consecutive items to be paid out, and the number of advantageous sections to be paid out. Is adapted to calculate the section payout ratio, continuous combination payout ratio in the last number of a particular game, the character object payout ratio, it is possible to easily calculate the advantageous section payout ratio.

  Further, in this embodiment, in calculating the advantageous section ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the advantageous section in the period of the predetermined number of games (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific number of games by the predetermined number (15). A ring buffer consisting of 15 sets of buffers each storing the number of games is provided, and by calculating the number of games in the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers, the number of games in the advantageous section in the specific game number period is calculated, The number of games in the advantageous section in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games) is calculated, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the most recent specific number of games can be easily calculated.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being accommodated in a board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the gaming machine information display 50 includes the game control board 40. The display contents can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a while being accommodated in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a. In addition, the board case 120a is sealed after the game control board 40 is accommodated, and in the sealed state, the board case 120a cannot be released without being released without leaving a trace. It has become. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine information display 50 from being tampered with.

  In the present embodiment, a game RAM area in which data corresponding to the progress of the game is stored in the RAM 41c, and a combination payout ratio, a combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. A non-game RAM area in which data used for the game is stored, and when the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied by the transition to the setting change state or the like, the data in the game RAM area is initialized while the non-game RAM area is Since the data in the RAM area is not initialized, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, the payout ratio, the payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. can be calculated and displayed in consideration of the previous data. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The game machine information display 50 is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the display content can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. In addition, the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is arranged inside the housing 1a. Since the inside is configured not to disturb the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm the display of the gaming machine information display 50 only by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. Yes, based on the display of the gaming machine information display 50, it can be easily confirmed whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state based on the design value.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, the setting is changed during bonus, advantageous section or bonus carryover, the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the bonus being carried over is cleared, While the bonus is being carried over, the game has been played more than the specified number, the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section, or the connection to the gaming machine information display 50 is not possible. In other words, it is detected that there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. It is detected that there is an event that may cause the gaming machine information display 50 to not correctly display the correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the item payout ratio, the combined part payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio. Therefore, fraud that prevents such information from being properly displayed can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. When the data such as the total payout number used when calculating the combined payout ratio, the item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio reaches a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50. Used to calculate the combined payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio by executing processing that avoids overflow and deleting related data once. If the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the combined payout ratio etc. exceeds the upper limit, it will be avoided. The payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display information such as a continuous combination payout ratio, a combination item payout ratio, and an advantageous section payout ratio in the predetermined display order in the gaming machine information display 50. (In this embodiment, every 30 seconds) and display, and within a period until the display of these combined payout ratios, etc. is completed, Even if these values can be updated to new values, updating to the new values is restricted and the display is cycled using the original values. A lot of information such as payout ratios can be displayed efficiently, and information updated at the same time is displayed as multiple types of information displayed in one cycle, so different times in one cycle Can be prevented from being mixed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between past 6000 games, and between past 6000 games. The payout ratio of the past, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the total cumulative payout number It is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is normal. If at least one of these data is determined to be abnormal, it is determined to be abnormal. The data and the data related to the data are initialized, and an indication that an abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”) is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 to notify the fact. Because the data necessary to calculate the advantageous section ratio etc. has been initialized, the calculation of these data is not performed normally, and the possibility that the advantageous section ratio etc. is not a normal value is recognized. be able to.

  When the abnormality of the RAM 41c is detected, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. In order to calculate the bonus payout ratio between the past, the advantageous payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout ratio, the payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the advantageous interval payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout number It is also possible to initialize the non-game RAM area in which the data used for the storage is stored. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to perform a simple process without specifying the abnormal data among these data. These data can be newly calculated.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing at which occurrence of the small role winning is determined according to the progress of the game, that is, at the symbol combination reel of the small role at which medals are paid out. The medals are actually paid out and the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the payout to be completed. Communicating combination payout ratio without payout associated with winning a role waits for the completion, character object payout ratio, it is possible to update the data used to calculate the preferred interval payout ratio.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the number is added may be a configuration in which a medal is actually given by the occurrence of a small role winning (addition of credit or detection of actual medal payout), and such a configuration is used. Thus, when the medals are stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small role, after the medals are actually paid out and the payout is completed, the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio It is possible to update the data used for the calculation of.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

In gaming machines that perform games,
Storage means having a storage area capable of storing a program;
Control means for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area of the storage means is
A game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area for storing a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game;
Including
A gaming machine that performs abnormality determination and output control of an external output signal output to an external device in the non-game program by calling the non-game program once from the game program.

Images